Main Menu 2013 CIVIC 4D Online Reference Owner's Manual

Contents

This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the 2 Safe Driving P. 25
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold. For Safe Driving P. 26 Seat Belts P. 30 Airbags P. 37

2 Instrument Panel P. 65
This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find
Indicators P. 66 Gauges and Displays P. 77
descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your
particular model. 2 Controls P. 97
Setting the Clock P. 98 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 99
Opening and Closing the Moonroof * P. 116
Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover) Adjusting the Seats P. 127
represent features and equipment that are available on some, but Climate Control System * P. 146
not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these
2 Features P. 149
features.
Audio System P. 150 Audio System Basic Operation P. 153, 156
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * P. 181
This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and
Canada.
2 Driving P. 213
The information and specifications included in this publication were Before Driving P. 214 Towing a Trailer P. 219
in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. Rearview Camera * P. 246 Refueling P. 247 Fuel Economy P. 250

reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications

2 Maintenance P. 253
or design at any time without notice and without incurring any Before Performing Maintenance P. 254 Maintenance MinderTM P. 257
obligation. Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 295
Heating and Cooling System */Climate Control System * Maintenance P. 308

2 Handling the Unexpected P. 313

Tools P. 314 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 315
Overheating P. 335 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 337

2 Information P. 345
Specifications P. 346 Identification Numbers P. 350
Emissions Testing P. 353 Warranty Coverages P. 355
Note: All page numbers referenced in this document are hyperlinked.

2013 CIVIC 4D Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents

Quick Reference Guide P. 2
Child Safety P. 50 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 62 Safety Labels P. 63

Safe Driving P. 25

Instrument Panel P. 65
Opening and Closing the Trunk P. 109 Security System P. 112 Opening and Closing the Windows P. 114
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 117 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 126
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 135 Heating and Cooling * P. 142
Controls P. 97

Audio Error Messages P. 175 General Information on the Audio System P. 178 Features P. 149

Driving P. 213

When Driving P. 223 Braking P. 241 Parking Your Vehicle P. 245

Accessories and Modifications P. 251 Maintenance P. 253

Maintenance Under the Hood P. 265 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 282 Handling the Unexpected P. 313
Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 297 Battery P. 306 Remote Transmitter Care * P. 307
Cleaning P. 309

Information P. 345
Engine Does Not Start P. 330 Jump Starting P. 331 Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 334
Fuses P. 341 Emergency Towing P. 344
Index P. 359

Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 351 Reporting Safety Defects P. 352
Authorized Manuals P. 357 Customer Service Information P. 358
 Main Menu

Quick Reference Guide

Visual Index
❙ ECON Button * (P 232)
Quick Reference Guide

❙ (Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®)

System OFF) Button * (P 237)
❙ System Indicators (P 66)
❙ Gauges (P 77)
❙ Information Display * (P 79)
❙ intelligent Multi-Information
Display (i-MID) * (P 81)
❙ Hazard Warning Button
❙ Audio System (P 153, 156)
❙ Navigation System *
() See Navigation System Manual
❙ Heating and Cooling System *
(P 142)
❙ Climate Control System * (P 146)
❙ Rear Window Defogger (P 124)
❙ Heated Mirror Button * (P 124)
❙ Seat Heater Switches * (P 141)
❙ Ignition Switch (P 117)
❙ Steering Wheel Adjustments
(P 125)
❙ (Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®)
System OFF) Button * (P 237)

2
Main Menu

❙ Headlights/Turn Signals (P 118)

Quick Reference Guide

❙ Fog Lights * (P 121)
❙ Km/Mile Change Knob (P 77)
❙ CLOCK Knob * (P 98)
❙ (Select/Reset) Knob (P 79, 81)
❙ Brightness Control (P 123)

❙ (Display/Information) Button * (P 81)

❙ Wipers/Washers (P 122)

❙ Cruise Control Buttons * (P 233)

❙ Horn (Press an area around .)

❙ Navigation System Voice Control Buttons *

() See Navigation System Manual
❙ Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System
Voice Control Buttons * (P 181)
❙ MENU Button * (P 85)
❙ SOURCE Button * (P 85)
❙ (+ / (- / / Buttons * (P 85)

* Not available on all models 3

 Main Menu

Visual Index
❙ Power Window Switches (P 114)
Quick Reference Guide

❙ Power Door Lock Master Switch * (P 104)

❙ Door Mirror Controls (P 126)

❙ Rearview Mirror (P 126)

❙ Interior Fuse Box (P 342)
❙ Driver's Front Airbag (P 40)
❙ Passenger's Front Airbag
(P 40)
❙ Parking Brake (P 241)
❙ Auxiliary Input Jack (P 151)

❙ Glove Box (P 136)

❙ Accessory Power Socket

(P 139)
❙ Shift Lever
Automatic Transmission
(P 227)
❙ Hood Release Handle (P 267) Manual Transmission
❙ Trunk Release (P 109) (P 229)
❙ Fuel Fill Door Release Handle (P 248)
❙ Driver’s Pocket
4
 Main Menu

❙ Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P 57)

❙ Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P 59)

Quick Reference Guide

❙ Side Curtain Airbags (P 46)
❙ Coat Hook (P 140)
❙ Grab Handle
❙ Seat Belts (P 30)
❙ Moonroof Switch * (P 116)
❙ Map Lights * (P 135)

❙ Sun Visors
❙ Vanity Mirrors
❙ USB Adapter Cable *
(P 151)
❙ Accessory Power
Socket * (P 139)

❙ Front Seat (P 127)

❙ Side Airbags (P 44)
❙ Ceiling Light (P 135)
❙ Rear Seat (P 133)
❙ LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P 55)
* Not available on all models 5
 Main Menu

Visual Index
❙ Maintenance Under the Hood (P 265)
Quick Reference Guide

❙ Windshield Wipers (P 122, 295)

❙ Power Door Mirrors (P 126)

❙ Door Lock/Unlock Control (P 101)

❙ Headlights (P 118, 282)

❙ Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker Lights (P 118, 289)
❙ Tires (P 297, 315)

❙ Fog Lights * (P 121, 286)

❙ How to Refuel (P 248)
❙ High-Mount Brake Light * (P 294)
❙ Opening/Closing the Trunk (P 109)
❙ Emergency Trunk Release Lever
(P 111)

❙ Rearview Camera * (P 246)

❙ Taillights (P 292)
❙ Back-Up Lights (P 292)
❙ Brake/Taillights (P 291)
❙ Rear Turn Signal Lights (P 291)
❙ Rear Side Marker Lights (P 291)
6
 Main Menu

Eco Assist System * (P 232)

Ambient Meter

Quick Reference Guide

● Changes color to reflect your driving
style.
Green: Fuel efficient driving
Blue green: Moderate acceleration/
deceleration
Blue: Aggressive acceleration/
deceleration
● The ambient meter color changes in
accordance with your brake or
accelerator pedal operation.

ECON Button (P 232) Models with i-MID

Helps maximize fuel economy. This message is displayed for a few seconds
when the ECON button is pressed.
ECON Mode Indicator (P 74)
Comes on when the ECON button is pressed.

* Not available on all models 7

 Main Menu

Quick Reference Guide

Safe Driving (P 25)

Airbags (P 37)
● Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and
your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.

Child Safety (P 50)

● All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
● Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
● Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.

Exhaust Gas Hazard (P 62)

● Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon
monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon
monoxide gas can accumulate.

Seat Belts (P 30)

● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
back in the seat.
● Check that your passengers are wearing
their seat belts correctly.
Before Driving Checklist (P 29)
● Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,
steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Fasten your lap belt as
low as possible.

8
 Main Menu

Instrument Panel (P 65)

Gauges (P 77)/Information Display * (P 79)/

Quick Reference Guide

intelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) * (P 81)/System Indicators (P 66)
2.4 ℓ engine models Speedometer
System Indicators i-VTEC System Indicators
Ambient Meter *
Indicator
Malfunction Turn Signal and
Indicator Lamp Rev Instant Fuel Hazard Warning
Indicator Indicators
Economy Gauge *
Low Oil Pressure Electric Power
Indicator Steering (EPS)
Fuel Gauge Indicator
Charging System
Indicator High Temperature
Indicator
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS) Low Temperature
Indicator Indicator
Security System
Shift Lever Position Indicator *
Low Fuel Indicator
Vehicle Stability Alarm Indicator *
Assist (VSA®) System Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator Indicator
VSA® OFF Indicator Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
Door Open Indicator CRUISE MAIN
Indicator *
Trunk Open Indicator CRUISE CONTROL
Indicator *
ECON Mode Indicator * System Message
Indicator *
Immobilizer System Tachometer Lights Reminders
Indicator Maintenance Minder
Lights On Indicator Indicator *
U. S. Parking Brake Low Tire Pressure/ Daytime Running
and Brake System TPMS Indicator * High Beam Indicator Lights Indicator *
Indicator
Washer Level
Canada Fog Light Indicator * Indicator *

* Not available on all models 9

 Main Menu

Controls (P 97)

Clock (P 98) Turn Signals (P 118) Wipers and Washers

Quick Reference Guide

(P 122)
Models without navigation system Turn Signal Control Lever

Right
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
Adjustment Ring *
: Long Delay
: Short Delay

Left
a Press the CLOCK knob to access the Pull toward
clock adjustment mode screen. you to spray
washer fluid.
b Turn the CLOCK knob to adjust the
hours. Lights (P 118)
MIST
c Press the CLOCK knob. The display Light Control Switches OFF
switches to minute adjustment. INT: Low speed with intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe
d Turn the CLOCK knob to adjust the High Beam HI: High speed wipe
minutes.
Low Beam
e Press the CLOCK knob to complete
clock adjustment.
Flashing

Models with navigation system

The navigation system receives signals from
GPS satellites, updating the clock
automatically.

10
 Main Menu

Steering Wheel (P 125) Trunk (P 109) Power Windows (P 114)

● To adjust, pull the adjustment lever ● With the ignition switch in ON (w , open
towards you, adjust to the desired and close the power windows.
position, then lock the lever back in place. ● If the power window lock button is in the

Quick Reference Guide

off position, each passenger's window
can be opened and closed with its own
switch.
● If the power window lock button is in the
on position (indicator is on), each
Trunk Release passenger's window switch is disabled.

● To unlock and open the trunk: Power Window Lock Button Indicator
• Pull the trunk release.
• Press the trunk release button *.
• Turn the key in the cylinder on the trunk *.
Window
Unlocking the Front Power Door Mirrors Switch
Doors from the Inside (P 126)
(P 103) ● With the ignition switch in ON (w , move
the selector switch to L or R.
● Pull either front door inner handle to
● Push the appropriate edge of the
unlock and open it at the same time.
adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.

Selector Switch

Adjustment Switch

* Not available on all models 11

 Main Menu

Heating and Cooling System * (P 142)

● Rotate the fan control dial to adjust the fan speed and airflow.
● Press the Mode buttons ( / / / ) to select the vents air flows from.
● Rotate the temperature control dial to adjust the temperature.
Quick Reference Guide

● Use the button for maximum cool setting.

● Rotate the fan control dial to OFF to turn the system off.
● Press the button to defrost the windshield.

Mode Buttons
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Button *
Button
Button
Button

Fan Control Temperature Control Dial

Dial
(Rear Window Defogger/
Button Heated Mirror *) Button
Button (Windshield Defroster) Button

Button (Rear Window Defogger) Button

Models without A/C button

Air flows from dashboard

vents.
Air flows from floor and
dashboard vents.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and
windshield defroster vents.

12
 Main Menu

Climate Control System * (P146)

● Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
● Press the button to turn the system on or off.
● Press the button to defrost the windshield.

Quick Reference Guide

On models with navigation system
The climate control system is voice operable. See the navigation system manual for complete details.

AUTO Button (ON/OFF) Button

Temperature Fan Control Dial

Control Dial
(MODE Control) Button
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
(Recirculation) Button
Air flows from floor and
(Windshield Defroster) Button windshield defroster vents.
Air flows from floor vents.
(Rear Window Defogger/
Heated Mirror) Button Air flows from floor and
dashboard vents.
Air flows from dashboard
vents.

* Not available on all models 13

 Main Menu

Features (P 149)

Audio system (P 150) For navigation system operation () See Navigation System Manual
Quick Reference Guide

On models with information display (P 153)

(CD Eject) Button CD Slot

CD/AUX Button AM Button

FM Button

VOL/PWR (Volume/Power) TUNE/SOUND Knob

Knob

/ (SEEK/SKIP) SCAN Button

Buttons
A.SEL (Auto Select) Button

DISP Button Preset Buttons (1-6)

14
 Main Menu

● Audio Remote Controls * (P 157)

On models with i-MID (P 156)
i-MID (+ / (- / / Button

Quick Reference Guide

SOURCE
Button

75°F 002300 miles ● (+ / (- Button

(Power) Button
Press and release to adjust the volume up/
CD Slot
down.
Preset Buttons ● SOURCE Button
(1-6) Press and release to change the audio
Button
mode: FM1/FM2/AM/CD/AUX.
SCAN Button (CD Eject) ● / Button
Button Radio:Press and release to change the
FM Button AUX Button preset station.
Press and hold to select the next or
AM Button CD Button previous strong station.
(Seek/Skip) (Seek/Skip) CD/USB device:
Button Button Press and release to skip to the
PHONE Button SETUP Button beginning of the next song or
return to the beginning of the
current song.
Press and hold to change a folder.
Button

Selector Knob

* Not available on all models 15

 Main Menu

Driving (P 213)

Manual Transmission * (P 229)

Quick Reference Guide

Automatic Transmission * (P 227)

● Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.

● Shifting

Park
P Turn off or start the engine.
Release Button

Transmission is locked. Shift Lever

Reverse
R
Neutral
N Transmission is not locked.
Drive
D Normal driving.

D3 Drive (D3)
Used when:
•Going up or down hills
•Towing a trailer in hilly terrain
2 Second
Used to increase engine braking
Depress the brake pedal and press the
release button to move out of (P .
(the transmission is locked in 2nd gear)

Press the release button to

1 First
move the shift lever.
Used to further increase engine braking
(the transmission is locked in 1st gear)
Move the shift lever without
pressing the release button.

16
 Main Menu

VSA® OFF Button (P 237) Refueling (P 247)

● The vehicle stability assist (VSA®) system Fuel recommendation: 1.8 ℓ engine models
helps stabilize the vehicle during
Unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number 87 or
cornering, and helps maintain traction

Quick Reference Guide

while accelerating on loose or slippery
higher required
road surfaces. 2.4 ℓ engine models
● VSA® comes on automatically every time Unleaded premium gasoline with a pump octane
you start the engine. number 91 or higher recommended
● To turn VSA® on or off, press and hold
the button until you hear a beep. Fuel tank capacity: 13.2 US gal (50 L)

Cruise Control * (P 233) a Push the fuel fill door

● Cruise control allows you to maintain a release handle.
set speed without keeping your foot on
the accelerator pedal.
● To use cruise control, press the CRUISE
button, then press the –/SET button once
you have achieved the desired speed b Turn the fuel fill cap
(above 25 mph or 40 km/h). slowly to remove the
cap.
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) (P 238)
U.S. models
c Place the cap in the
● TPMS monitors tire pressure. holder on the fuel fill
● TPMS is turned on automatically every door.
time you start the engine.

d After refueling, screw

the cap back on until it
clicks at least once.

* Not available on all models 17

 Main Menu

Maintenance (P 253)

Under the Hood (P 265)

Quick Reference Guide

● Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer

fluid. Add when necessary.
Wiper Blades (P 295)
● Check brake fluid and clutch fluid. ● Replace blades if they leave streaks
● Check the battery regularly. across the windshield.

a Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the

dashboard.

b Locate the hood latch lever, pull the lever up, and lift up
the hood.

Tires (P 297) Lights (P 282)

● Inspect tires and wheels regularly. ● Inspect all lights regularly.
● Check tire pressures regularly.
● Install snow tires for winter
driving.

c When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly

locked in place.

18
 Main Menu

Handling the Unexpected (P 313)

Flat Tire (P 315, 322) Engine Won't Start Overheating (P 335)

Quick Reference Guide

● Park in a safe location and replace the ● Park in a safe location. If you do not see
(P 330)
flat tire with the compact spare tire * in steam under the hood, open the hood,
● If the battery is dead, jump start using a and let the engine cool down.
the trunk, or repair the flat tire using the
booster battery.
tire repair kit *.

Blown Fuse (P 341) Emergency Towing

Indicators Come On ● Check for a blown fuse if an electrical (P 344)
device does not operate.
(P 337) ● Call a professional towing service if you
● Identify the indicator and consult the need to tow your vehicle.
owner's manual.

* Not available on all models 19

 Main Menu

What to Do If
The ignition switch does The steering wheel may be locked.
Quick Reference Guide

not turn from (0 to (q . ● Try to turn the steering wheel left and right
Why? while turning the ignition key.

The ignition switch does The shift lever should be moved to (P .

not turn from (q to (0 and
I cannot remove the key.
Why?

Why does the brake pedal This can occur when the ABS activates, and does not indicate a
pulsate slightly when problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never
applying the brakes? pump the brake pedal.

The rear door cannot be Check if the childproof lock is in the

opened from inside the lock position. If so, open the rear
vehicle. Why? door with the outside door handle.
To cancel this function, push the lever
to the unlock position.

20
 Main Menu

Models with remote transmitter If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are
Why do the doors lock relocked automatically for security.

Quick Reference Guide

after I unlocked the doors
using a remote
transmitter?

Why does the beeper The beeper sounds when:

sound when I open the ● The key is left in the ignition switch.

driver's door? ● The exterior lights are left on.

Why does the beeper The beeper sounds when:

sound when I start driving? ● Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts.

● The parking brake lever is not fully released.

Why do I hear a screeching The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle
sound when I apply the inspected by a dealer.
brake pedal?

2.4 ℓ engine models Unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number of 91 or higher
Is it possible to use is recommended.
unleaded gasoline with a If premium unleaded gasoline with a PON of 91 or higher is not
Pump Octane Number available, you can temporarily use the gasoline with a PON of
(PON) of 87 or higher on 87 or higher.
this vehicle? This will result in decreased engine performance, and can cause
occasional metallic knocking noise in the engine.

21
 Main Menu

California Proposition 65 Warning To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
WARNING: This product contains or emits vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
chemicals known to the state of California to cause have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
Quick Reference Guide

cancer and birth defects or other reproductive access to the vehicle or the EDR.
harm.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by
Event Data Recorders
anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
vehicle owner.
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
Service Diagnostic Recorders
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
information about powertrain performance. The data can be used
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with
designed to record such data as:
data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
confidential.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened; California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this
and/or brake pedal; and, vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may
• How fast the vehicle was traveling. apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.

22
 Main Menu

A Few Words About Safety You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And ● Safety Labels - on the vehicle.

Quick Reference Guide

operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility. ● Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and other information on labels and These signal words mean:
in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
could hurt you or others. 3DANGER
you don't follow instructions.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
3WARNING
hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You you don't follow instructions.
must use your own good judgement.
You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
3CAUTION
instructions.

● Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.

● Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.
● Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information - please

read it carefully.

23
 Main Menu

24
 Main Menu

Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.

For Safe Driving Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 46

Important Safety Precautions ............. 26 Airbag System Indicators.................... 47
Your Vehicle's Safety Features............ 28 Airbag Care ....................................... 49
Seat Belts Child Safety
About Your Seat Belts........................ 30 Protecting Child Passengers ............... 50
Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 33 Safety of Infants and Small Children .......52
Seat Belt Inspection............................ 36 Safety of Larger Children ................... 60
Airbags Exhaust Gas Hazard
Airbag System Components............... 37 Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 62
Types of Airbags ................................ 40 Safety Labels
Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 40 Label Locations .................................. 63
Side Airbags....................................... 44

25
 Main Menu Table of Contents

For Safe Driving

The following pages explain your vehicle's safety features and how to use them
properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
most important.
Safe Driving

Important Safety Precautions

1Important Safety Precautions
■ Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use
of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the
supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped
driver while driving.
with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.

■ Restrain all children

Children age 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the
front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger
children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat.

■ Be aware of airbag hazards

While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants
who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,
and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.

■ Don't drink and drive

Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to
changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.
So don't drink and drive, and don't let your friends drink and drive, either.

26
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions

■ Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely

Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to

Safe Driving
divert some attention away from driving.

■ Control your speed

Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher
the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.
Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.

■ Keep your vehicle in safe condition

Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.
To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition
frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

27
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features

Your Vehicle's Safety Features

1Your Vehicle's Safety Features
9 8 9 Your vehicle is equipped with many features that
work together to help protect you and your
Safe Driving

passengers during a crash.

6
Some features do not require any action on your part.
These include a strong steel framework that forms a
10
safety cage around the passenger compartment,
7 front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering
8 column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat
10 belts in a sufficient crash.

However, you and your passengers cannot take full

11 advantage of these features unless you remain seated
in the correct position and always wear your seat
belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to
Safety Cage injuries if they are not used properly.
Crush Zones
7
Seats and Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Collapsible Steering Column
6 Seat Belts
7 Front Airbags
8 Side Airbags
9 Side Curtain Airbags
10 Door Locks
11 Seat Belt Tensioners

The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and
your passengers.

28
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features

1Safety CheckList
■ Safety CheckList
If the door open indicator is on, a door is not
For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items completely closed. Close all doors tightly until the
each time before you drive. indicator goes off.

Safe Driving
• After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors are closed and locked. 2 Door Open Indicator P. 70
Locking the doors helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider
from unexpectedly opening a door. *

2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 103

• Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are
adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the
vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a
crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 127
• Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective
when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller
persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 130
• Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any
passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 33
• Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child's age, height
and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 50

* Not available on all models 29

 Main Menu Table of Contents

Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you 1About Your Seat Belts
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety
features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the 3 WARNING
vehicle, against other passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat
Safe Driving

Not wearing a seat belt properly increases

belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full the chance of serious injury or death in a
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags. crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
- frontal impacts Be sure you and your passengers always
- side impacts wear seat belts and wear them properly.
- rear impacts
- rollovers Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
■ Lap/shoulder seat belts risk of serious injury.
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories
locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping require you to wear seat belts.
some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to
restrain your body. The rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with
child seats.
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 57

30
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

■ Proper use of seat belts 1About Your Seat Belts

Follow these guidelines for proper use: If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends
• All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduces the effectiveness of this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the

Safe Driving
the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash. seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.
Then refasten the belt.
• Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
• Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort
or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability
and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

■ Seat Belt Reminder 1Seat Belt Reminder

The indicator will also come on if a front passenger
Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If does not fasten their seat belt within 6 seconds after
*
the ignition switch is turned to ON (w before the ignition switch is turned to ON (w .
the driver's seat belt is fastened, a beeper will When no one is sitting in the front passenger's seat,
sound and the indicator will blink. If the driver or a child or small adult is riding there, the indicator
does not fasten the belt before the beeper will not come on.
stops, the indicator will remain on. This is because the weight sensors in the seat cannot
detect their presence.

The beeper will also periodically sound and

the indicator will blink while driving until the
driver's and front passenger’s seat belts are
fastened.

* Not available on all models Continued 31

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

■ Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety. If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come
on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and
Safe Driving

The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-to- thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not
severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to offer protection in a subsequent crash.
inflate the front airbags.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.

32
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Fastening a Seat Belt

After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well 1Fastening a Seat Belt
back in the seat: No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 127 belt or one that does not appear to be working
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly. correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working

Safe Driving
Pull out slowly. properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.
Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Correct
Seated Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or
Posture. retractor mechanism.

2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then

Latch
Plate tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is
secure.
u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.
Buckle

Continued 33
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as 1Fastening a Seat Belt
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part 3 WARNING
Lap belt
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic
Safe Driving

as low as Improperly positioning the seat belts can

possible bones take the force of a crash and reduces cause serious injury or death in a crash.
the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to Make sure all seat belts are properly
remove any slack, then check that the belt positioned before driving.
rests across the center of your chest and
over your shoulder. This spreads the forces To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then
of a crash over the strongest bones in your guide the belt by hand until it has retracted
upper body. completely.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of
the way and will not get caught by closing the door.

1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor

■ Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height
occupants. one level at a time.
1. Move the anchor up and down while
holding the release button. After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests anchor position is secure.
across the center of your chest and over
your shoulder.
Push

34
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

1Advice for Pregnant Women

■ Advice for Pregnant Women
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when okay for you to drive.
driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the

Safe Driving
belt as low as possible across the hips. To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your
unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front
Wear the shoulder belt
airbag:
across the chest avoiding
the abdomen. • When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle.
• When sitting in the front passenger's seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.

Wear the lap part of the

belt as low as possible
across the hips.

35
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection

Seat Belt Inspection

Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows: 1Seat Belt Inspection

• Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear. 3 WARNING
• Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily.
Safe Driving

Not checking or maintaining seat belts can

u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only result in serious injury or death if the seat
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make belts do not work properly when needed.
sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Check your seat belts regularly and have
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper any problem corrected as soon as possible.
protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of
protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after
any collision.

36
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Airbags
Airbag System Components

Safe Driving
Continued 37
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

The front, front side, and side curtain d An electronic control unit that continually h Impact sensors that can detect a
airbags are deployed according to the monitors and records information about moderate-to-severe front or side
direction and severity of impact. Both side the sensors, the airbag activators, the collision.
curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover. seat belt tensioners, and driver and front
Safe Driving

The airbag system includes: passenger seat belt use when the ignition i An indicator on the dashboard that alerts
switch is in ON (w . you that the front passenger's front
a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbag has been turned off.
front airbags. The driver's airbag is stored e Automatic front seat belt tensioners. The
in the center of the steering wheel; the driver's and front passenger's seat belts j An indicator on the instrument panel that
front passenger's airbag is stored in the incorporate sensors that detect whether alerts you to a possible problem with your
dashboard. Both are marked SRS or not they are fastened. airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
AIRBAG.
fA driver's seat position sensor. If the seat kA rollover sensor that detects whether
b Two side airbags, one for the driver and is too far forward, the airbag will inflate the vehicle is about to roll over.
one for a front passenger. The airbags are with less force.
stored in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG. g Weight sensors in the front passenger's
seat. The front passenger's airbag will be
c Two side curtain airbags, one for each turned off if the weight on the seat is 65
side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant
in the ceiling, above the side windows. or small child).
The front and rear pillars are marked
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.

38
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

1Important facts about your airbags

■ Important facts about your airbags
Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,

Safe Driving
and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing When driving, keep hands and arms out of the
their seat belts properly and sitting correctly. deployment path of the front airbag by holding each
side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over
the airbag cover.
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as
far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as
possible.

Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that
can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags
deploy.

Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp
object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.

Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the
covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags
or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

39
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags

Types of Airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags: 1Types of Airbags
• Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver's and front passenger's seats. The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch
• Side airbags: Airbags in the driver's and front passenger's seat-backs. is in ON (w .
• Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Safe Driving

Each is discussed in the following pages. After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a
small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion
process of the inflator material and is not harmful.
People with respiratory problems may experience
some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

Front Airbags (SRS) 1Front Airbags (SRS)

Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect
(SRS)
the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger. Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiple-
threshold front airbags (SRS).
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant's primary both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate
restraint system. at different rates, depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/
or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to
■ Housing Locations supplement the seat belts to help reduce the
likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and
crashes.
in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.

40
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

■ Operation
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control

Safe Driving
unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.

A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a
vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.

■ How the Front Airbags Work 1How the Front Airbags Work
Although the driver's and front passenger's airbags
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the
normally inflate within a split second of each other, it
front airbag provides supplemental protection is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can
for your head and chest. happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,
or threshold, that determines whether or not the
The front airbags deflate immediately so that airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will
they won't interfere with the driver's visibility provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental
protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
or the ability to steer or operate other
controls.

The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.

Continued 41
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

■ When front airbags should not deploy

Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and
help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur
during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Safe Driving

Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration
causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side
airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the
severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which
can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear
impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed
to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: Seat belts and, in vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side airbags
and side curtain airbags offer the best protection in a rollover. Because front airbags
could provide little if any protection, they are not designed to deploy during a
rollover.
■ When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■ When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.

42
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

1Advanced Airbags
■ Advanced Airbags
If there is a problem with the driver's seat position
Your front airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag
related injuries to smaller occupants. will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the

Safe Driving
The driver's advanced front airbag system driver's seating position.
includes a seat position sensor.
For both advanced front airbags to work properly:
If the seat is too far forward, the airbag • Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats.
• Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat.
inflates with less force, regardless of the • Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
Driver’s severity of the impact. the floor. Improperly positioned objects can
Seat
interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
Position
Sensor • All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat
belts properly.
The passenger's advanced front airbag system • Do not place any cover over the passenger side
dashboard.
has weight sensors.

Although Honda recommends against

Passenger’s carrying an infant or small child in front, if the
Seat sensors detect the weight of a child (up to
Weight
Sensors about 65 lbs or 29 kg), the system will
automatically turn off the passenger's front
airbag.

43
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the upper torso of the driver or a front passenger 1Side Airbags
during a moderate-to-severe side impact. Make sure you and your front passenger always sit
upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can
■ Housing Locations prevent the airbag from deploying properly and
Safe Driving

increases your risk of serious injury.

The side airbags are housed in the outside
edge of the driver's and passenger's seat- Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.
backs. They can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.

Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG. If the impact is on the passenger side, the airbag
deploys even if there is no passenger in the front
Housing passenger seat.
Location
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers
without consulting a dealer.
Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back
■ Operation covers can prevent your side airbags from properly
When the sensors detect a moderate-to- deploying during a side impact.
When
inflated severe side impact, the control unit signals the
side airbag on the impact side to immediately
inflate.

Side
Airbag

44
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

■ When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage

Because the airbag systems senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side
of the vehicle's framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there
may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough

Safe Driving
impact to deploy the airbag.

■ When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe
It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in
apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was towards
the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle's crushable body parts
absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have
been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.

45
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags

Side Curtain Airbags

The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in outer 1Side Curtain Airbags
seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is
equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt
Safe Driving

rollover crashes. tensioners.

■ Housing Locations If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the

passenger’s side curtain airbag will inflate even if
The side curtain airbags are located in the there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.
ceiling above the side windows on both sides
of the vehicle. To get the best protection from the side curtain
airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts
properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.

Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof

pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.
Side Curtain Airbag Storage

■ Operation
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy
in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side
impact.

Deployed Side Curtain Airbag

46
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

■ When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision

One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal
collision.
In this case, the side curtain airbags will deploy slightly after the front airbags.

Safe Driving
Airbag System Indicators 1SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator

If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a 3 WARNING
message appears on the i-MID *.
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in
serious injury or death if the airbag systems
■ SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator or tensioners do not work properly.
■ When the ignition switch is turned to
*
ON (w Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as
The indicator comes on for a few seconds, soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts
then goes off. This tells you the system is you to a possible problem.
working properly.

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the
system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don't, your airbags and seat
belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.

* Not available on all models Continued 47

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

■ Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and
U.S. Canada
■ When the passenger airbag off no objects on the passenger’s seat, or with an adult
indicator comes on riding there, something may be interfering with the
Safe Driving

The indicator comes on to alert you that the weight sensors. Such as:
passenger's front airbag has been turned off.
This occurs when the weight sensors detect • An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back
pocket.
65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the weight of an infant
• A child seat or other object pressing against the
or small child, on the seat. rear of the seat-back.
• A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of
the front passenger's seat.
• The front seat or seat-back is forced back against
Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat. an object on the seat or floor behind it.
2 Child Safety P. 50 • An object placed under the front passenger's seat.

If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle

Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger's front airbag will not deploy and The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and
the indicator will not come on. goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is
near the airbag cutoff threshold.

48
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAirbagsuAirbag Care

Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any 1Airbag Care
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag
inspected by a dealer in the following situations: system components, including the airbag, tensioners,
sensors, and control unit.

Safe Driving
■ When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.
Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be
replaced.

■ When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision

Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s
seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt
tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.

■ Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer

This would likely disable the driver's seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the
passenger's seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate
a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American
Honda Automobile Customer Service at 800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles,
Honda Canada Customer Relations at 888-9-HONDA-9.

49
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are 1Protecting Child Passengers
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the
number one cause of death of children age 12 and under. 3 WARNING
Safe Driving

Children who are unrestrained or

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province improperly restrained can be seriously
and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride injured or killed in a crash.
in a vehicle.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because: properly restrained in a child seat. A larger
• An inflating front or side airbag can injure child should be properly restrained with a
or kill a child sitting in the front seat. seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.

• A child in the front seat is more likely to The National Highway Traffic Safety
interfere with the driver's ability to safely Administration and Transport Canada recommend
control the vehicle. that all children age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/
territories have laws restricting where children may
• Statistics show that children of all sizes and ride.
ages are safer when they are properly
restrained in a rear seat.

50
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers

• Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an 1Protecting Child Passengers
approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the lap belt
portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system. 3 WARNING

Safe Driving
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or
• Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the wrap one around their neck can result in
event of a collision. serious injury or death.

• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would Instruct children not to play with any seat
likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries. belt and make sure any unused seat belt a
child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,
• Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very and locked.
seriously injured in a crash.
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
• Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments. and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

• Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when To remind you of the passenger's front airbag
hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning
the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate
labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the
vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly. front visors. Please read and follow the instructions
on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 63

51
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safety of Infants and Small Children

1Protecting Infants
■ Protecting Infants
An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the 3 WARNING
infant reaches the seat maker's weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is
Safe Driving

Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front

at least one year old. seat can result in serious injury or death
■ Positioning a rear-facing child seat during a crash.
Child seats must be placed and secured in a
rear seating position. Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.

Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a

forward facing position.

Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s

instructions before installation.
When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back
in the desired position.

It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger's advanced front airbag
system.
2 Airbags P. 37

If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front
passenger's seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.
Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

52
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

1Protecting Smaller Children

■ Protecting Smaller Children
If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child 3 WARNING
seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured

Safe Driving
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the
forward-facing child seat. front seat can result in serious injury or
■ Forward-facing child seat placement death if the front airbag inflates.
We strongly recommend placing a forward-
facing child seat in a rear seating position. If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.

Educate yourself about the laws and regulations

regarding child seat use where you are driving, and
follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with
advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger's front airbag off. A Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat
rear seat is the safest place for a child. up to age two, if the child’s height and weight are
appropriate for a rear-facing seat.

Continued 53
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

1Selecting a Child Seat

■ Selecting a Child Seat
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren). simple.
Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
Safe Driving

are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat to simplify the installation process and reduce the
manufacturer's use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual. likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.
Proper installation is key to maximizing your child's safety.

In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH compatible
child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.
This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat
once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual
for proper installation instructions.

■ Important consideration when selecting a child seat

Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

54
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats.
A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of

Safe Driving
connectors.
1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.

Marks

Lower Anchors 2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat then
attach the child seat to the lower anchors
according to the instructions that came
with the child seat.
u When installing the child seat, make sure
that the lower anchors are not
obstructed by the seat belt or any other
Rigid Type object.

Continued 55
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

For your child's safety, when using a child seat
installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the
Safe Driving

seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat

that is not properly secured will not adequately
protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the
child or other vehicle occupants.

Flexible Type

Tether 3. Open the tether anchor cover behind the

Strap head restraint.
Hook 4. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position, then route the tether strap
between the head restraint legs, and secure
the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat maker.
Anchor
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.

56
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

■ Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not
1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat. adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
2. Route the seat belt through the child seat injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

Safe Driving
according to the seat maker's instructions,
and insert the latch plate into the buckle.
u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.

3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all

the way out until it stops. This activates the
lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt completely wind up into
the retractor, then try to pull it out to make
sure the retractor is locked.
u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not
activated. Pull the seat belt all the way
out, and repeat steps 2 – 4.
5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near
the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt.
u When doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle
seat.

Continued 57
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by 1Installing a Child Seat with a Seat Belt
rocking it forward and back and side to To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
side; little movement should be felt. and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
Safe Driving

can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor

is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.

58
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Adding Security with a Tether 1Adding Security with a Tether

Since a tether can provide additional security to the
Tether Anchorage Points A tether anchorage point is provided behind lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend
each rear seating position. A child seat that is using a tether whenever one is available.

Safe Driving
installed with a seat belt and comes with a
tether can use the tether for additional
security.

1. Locate the appropriate tether anchorage

point and lift the cover.
Anchor Cover

Outer Position Tether

2. Raise the head restraint to its highest
Strap position, then route the tether strap
Hook through the head restraint legs. Make sure
the strap is not twisted.

Anchor
Center Position Tether 3. Secure the tether strap hook onto the
Strap anchor.
Hook 4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.

Anchor

59
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

Safety of Larger Children

1Safety of Larger Children
■ Protecting Larger Children
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind 3 WARNING
of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who
Safe Driving

Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in

must sit in front. front can result in injury or death if the
passenger's front airbag inflates.
■ Checking Seat Belt Fit
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
have the child sit up properly and wear the
following questions.
seat belt properly, using a booster seat if
■ Checklist needed.
• Do the child's knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
• Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child's neck and arm?
• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child's thighs?
• Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.

60
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

1Booster Seats
■ Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used instructions that came with it, and install the seat
properly, position the child in a booster seat in accordingly.

Safe Driving
a rear seating position. For the child's safety, There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a
check that the child meets the booster seat booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat
manufacturer's recommendations. belt correctly.

Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and

territories require children to use a booster seat until
they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60
lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or
province, or territory where you intend to drive.
■ Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever
have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
• Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
• Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
• Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
• Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.

■ Monitoring child passengers

We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more
mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up
properly.

61
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Exhaust Gas Hazard

Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless, 1Carbon Monoxide Gas
odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon
monoxide gas will not get into the interior. 3 WARNING
Safe Driving

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.

■ Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise. even kill you.
• The exhaust system may have been damaged.
• The vehicle is raised for an oil change. Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that
expose you to carbon monoxide.
When you operate a vehicle with the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into
the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open, An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up
open all the windows and set the heating and cooling system */climate control with carbon monoxide gas.
system * as shown below. Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.
Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the
garage immediately after starting the engine.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the mode.
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.

Adjust the heating and cooling system */climate control system * in the same manner
if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running.

62 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

Safety Labels
Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer

Safe Driving
for a replacement.

Sun Visor

U.S. models Canadian models

Dashboard
U.S. models only Doorjambs Canadian models

U.S. models

Radiator Cap

63
 Main Menu Table of Contents

64
 Main Menu

Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.

Indicators ............................................ 66
intelligent Multi-Information Display (i-
MID) Warning and Information
Messages * ....................................... 75
Gauges and Displays
Gauges.............................................. 77
Information Display * .......................... 79
intelligent Multi-Information Display (i-
MID) * .............................................. 81

* Not available on all models 65

 Main Menu Table of Contents

Indicators

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message *

● Comes on for a few seconds when ● Comes on while driving - Make sure
you turn the ignition switch to ON the parking brake is released. Check the
(w , then goes off. brake fluid level.
U.S. ● Comes on when the parking brake 2 What to do when the indicator
is applied, and goes off when it is comes on P. 339
Instrument Panel

released. ● Comes on along with the ABS

Parking Brake indicator - Have the vehicle checked by a
● Comes on when the brake fluid
and Brake dealer.
Canada level is low.
System Indicator 2 If the Brake System Indicator Comes
● Comes on if there is a problem
with the brake system. On P. 339
● The beeper sounds and the
indicator comes on if you drive
with the parking brake not fully
released.
● Comes on when you turn the ● Comes on while driving - Immediately
ignition switch to ON (w , and goes stop in a safe place.
Low Oil Pressure
off when the engine starts. 2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Indicator Comes On P. 337
● Comes on when the engine oil
pressure is low.

66 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message *

● Comes on when you turn the ● Readiness codes are part of the on board
ignition switch to ON (w , and goes diagnostics for the emissions control
off either when the engine starts or systems.
after several seconds if the engine 2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 353
is not started. If “readiness codes” ● Comes on while driving - Have the

Instrument Panel
have not been set, it blinks five vehicle checked by a dealer.
Malfunction
times before it goes off. ● Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe
Indicator Lamp
● Comes on if there is a problem place where there are no flammable
with the emissions control system. objects. Stop the engine for 10 minutes
● Blinks when a misfire in the or more, and wait for it to cool down.
engine's cylinders is detected. Then, take the vehicle to a dealer.
2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Comes On or Blinks P. 338

● Comes on when you turn the ● Comes on while driving - Turn off the
ignition switch to ON (w , and goes heating and cooling system */climate
Charging System off when the engine starts. control system * and rear defogger in
Indicator ● Comes on when the battery is not order to reduce electricity consumption.
charging. 2 If the Charging System Indicator
Comes On P. 337

Shift Lever ● Indicates in which position your

Position 2 Shifting P. 227 —
shift lever is.
Indicator *

Indicator

* Not available on all models Continued 67

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message *

● Comes on for a few seconds when ● Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden
you turn the ignition switch to ON starts and acceleration and have the
Transmission
(w , then goes off. vehicle checked by a dealer
Indicator * ● Blinks if the transmission system has immediately.
a problem.
Instrument Panel

● Comes on and the beeper sounds if ● The beeper stops and the indicator goes
you are not wearing a seat belt when off when you and the front passenger
you turn the ignition switch to ON fasten their seat belts.
(w . ● Stays on after you or the front
● If the front passenger is not wearing passenger has fastened the seat
Seat Belt
a seat belt, the indicator comes on belt - A detection error may have
Reminder
about six seconds later. occurred in the sensor. Have the vehicle
Indicator ● Blinks while driving if either you or checked by a dealer.
the front passenger has not fastened 2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 31
a seat belt. The beeper sounds and
the indicator blinks at regular
intervals.
● Comes on when the fuel reserve is ● Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon
running low (approximately 1.9 U.S. as possible.
Low Fuel
gal./7.5 Liter left). ● Blinks - Have the vehicle checked by a
Indicator ● Blinks if there is a problem with the dealer.
fuel gauge.

68 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message *

● Comes on for a few seconds when ● Stays on constantly - Have the
you turn the ignition switch to ON vehicle checked by a dealer. With this
ABS (Anti-lock (w , then goes off. indicator on, your vehicle still has
Brake System) ● If it comes on at any other time, there normal braking ability but no anti-lock
Indicator is a problem with the ABS. function.

Instrument Panel
2 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
P. 243

● Comes on for a few seconds when ● Stays on constantly or does not

you turn the ignition switch to ON come on at all - Have the vehicle
(w , then goes off. checked by a dealer.
Supplemental ● Comes on if a problem with any of
Restraint System the following is detected:
Indicator - Supplemental restraint system
- Side airbag system
- Side curtain airbag system
- Seat belt tensioner
● Comes on for a few seconds when ● Blinks while driving - Drive slowly to
you turn the ignition switch to ON prevent overheating.
High Temperature (w , then goes off. ● Stays on while driving - Immediately
Indicator ● Blinks when the engine coolant stop in a safe place and allow the
temperature goes up, and stays on if engine to cool.
the temperature continues to rise. 2 Overheating P. 335

* Not available on all models Continued 69

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message *

● Comes on for a few seconds when ● Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle
you turn the ignition switch to ON checked by a dealer.
VSA® (Vehicle
(w , then goes off. 2 VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka
Stability Assist) ESC (Electronic Stability Control),
● Blinks when VSA® is active.
System Indicator System P. 236
● Comes on if there is a problem with
Instrument Panel

the VSA® system.

● Comes on for a few seconds when
VSA® (Vehicle you turn the ignition switch to ON
Stability Assist) (w , then goes off. 2 VSA® On and Off P. 237 —
OFF Indicator ● Comes on when you deactivate
VSA®.
● Comes on for a few seconds if you ● Goes off when all doors are closed.
turn the ignition switch to ON (w ,
then goes off.
Door Open ● Comes on if any door is not
Indicator completely closed.
● The beeper sounds and the indicator
comes on if any door is opened
while driving.

70 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message *

● Comes on for a few seconds if you turn ● Goes off when the trunk is closed.
the ignition switch to ON (w , then goes
Trunk Open
off.
Indicator ● Comes on if the trunk is not completely
closed.

Instrument Panel
EPS (Electric ● Comes on when you turn the ignition ● Stays on constantly or does not
Power switch to ON (w , and goes off when the come on at all - Have the vehicle
Steering) engine starts. checked by a dealer.
System ● Comes on if there is a problem with the 2 If the EPS System Indicator Comes
Indicator EPS (Electric Power Steering) System. On P. 339

● Comes on for a few seconds when you ● Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Daytime
turn the ignition switch to ON (w , then 2 Daytime Running Lights P. 121
Running
goes off. —
Lights ● Comes on if there is a problem with the
Indicator *
DRL system.
● Comes on for a few seconds when you ● Comes on while driving - Stop in a
U.S. turn the ignition switch to ON (w . safe place, check tire pressures, and
models ● Comes on if the tire pressure of any of the inflate the tire(s) if necessary.
Low Tire tires becomes significantly low.
Pressure/
● Blinks for about one minute, and then
stays on if there is a problem with the ● Blinks and remains on - Have the
TPMS vehicle checked by a dealer. If the
Indicator TPMS, or when a compact spare tire * is
temporarily installed. vehicle is fitted with a compact spare,
get your regular tire repaired or
replaced and put back on your vehicle
as soon as you can.

* Not available on all models Continued 71

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message *

● Comes on for a few seconds when ● While the indicator is on, press the
you turn the ignition switch to ON (display/information) button to see the
(w , then goes off. message again.
● Comes on along with a beep when a ● Refer to the Indicators information in
problem is detected. A system
Instrument Panel

System Message this chapter when a system message

message on the i-MID appears at the —
Indicator * appears on the i-MID. Take the
same time. appropriate action for the message.
● The i-MID does not return to the normal
screen unless the warning is canceled,
or the button is pressed.
● The turn signal indicators blink when ● Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A
Turn Signal and you operate the turn signal lever. turn signal light bulb has blown.
Hazard Warning ● If you press the hazard warning Change the bulb immediately. —
Indicators button, both indicators and all turn 2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 289, 291
signals blink at the same time.

High Beam ● Comes on when the high beam

headlights are on. — —
Indicator

● Comes on whenever the light switch ● If you remove the key from the ignition
Lights On is on, or in AUTO * when the exterior switch while the exterior lights are on, a
—
Indicator lights are on. chime sounds when the driver's door is
opened.

Fog Light
● Comes on when the fog lights are
on. — —
Indicator *

72 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message *

● Comes on briefly when you turn the ● Blinks - You cannot start the engine.
ignition switch to ON (w , then goes Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 ,
off. pull the key out, and then insert the key
● Comes on if the immobilizer system and turn it to ON (w again.
Immobilizer cannot recognize the key ● Repeatedly blinks - The system may

Instrument Panel
—
System Indicator information. be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer.
● Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it. Electrical
problems can occur.
● Blinks when the security system
Security System alarm has been set. 2 Security System Alarm * P. 112 —
Alarm Indicator *
Indicator

● Comes on for a few seconds when ● If the indicator stays on after the engine
you turn the ignition switch to ON has reached normal operating
Low Temperature
(w . temperature, there may be problem —
Indicator ● Comes on when the engine coolant with the temperature sensors. Have the
temperature is low. vehicle inspected by a dealer.

* Not available on all models Continued 73

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message *

● Comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w , and goes
ECON Mode
off when the engine starts. 2 ECON Button * P. 232
Indicator * ● Comes on when you press the
ECON button.
Instrument Panel

CRUISE MAIN
● Comes on when you press the
CRUISE button. 2 Cruise Control* P. 233 —
Indicator *

CRUISE ● Comes on if you have set a speed for

CONTROL cruise control. 2 Cruise Control* P. 233 —
Indicator *

Washer Level
● Comes on when the washer fluid is ● Refill the washer fluid.
low. 2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid —
Indicator *
P. 281

Maintenance ● Comes on when the scheduled

maintenance is due soon. 2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 257 —
Minder Indicator *

● Comes on when the i-VTEC system ● When the i-VTEC indicator comes on,
switches the low RPM cams to the the rev indicator begins to come on
i-VTEC Indicator *
—
high RPM cams. simultaneously.
Indicator 2 i-VTEC indicator P. 78

● Come on when the tachometer

Rev Indicators * reading approaches the red zone. 2 Rev indicators P. 78 —
Indicator

74 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIndicatorsuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) Warning and Information Messages *

intelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) Warning and Information Messages *

The following messages appear only on the i-MID. Press the (display/information) button to see the message again with the system
message indicator on.
Message Condition Explanation
● Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not
installed. 2 Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 338

Instrument Panel
● Appears if there is a problem with the DRL system. ● Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Daytime Running Lights P. 121

Canadian models ● Appears when the washer fluid is low. ● Refill the washer fluid.
2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 281

* Not available on all models Continued 75

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIndicatorsuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) Warning and Information Messages *

Message Condition Explanation

● Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due soon.
● Consequently, SERVICE DUE NOW and SERVICE 2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the i-MID P. 262
PAST DUE follow.
Instrument Panel

● Appears when you open the driver's door while the ● Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 , then remove the
ignition key is in ACCESSORY (q . key.

● Appears when you open the driver's door while the ● Remove the key from the ignition switch.
ignition key is in LOCK (0 .

76
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Gauges and Displays

Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators. 1Gauges
They are displayed when the ignition switch is in ON (w . Press and hold the km/mile change knob until you
hear a beep. The speedometer reading and the
■ Speedometer displayed measurements switch between mph and
km/h.
Displays your driving speed in mph or km/h.

Instrument Panel
■ Tachometer
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.

■ Fuel Gauge 1Fuel Gauge

Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank. NOTICE
You should refuel when the reading approaches E .
Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.

The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from

the fuel gauge reading.

■ Instant Fuel Economy Gauge * 1Instant Fuel Economy Gauge *

Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100km. Press and hold the km/mile change knob to switch
the measurement.

* Not available on all models Continued 77

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuGauges and Displays uGauges

1Rev indicators
■ i-VTEC and Rev Indicators *
When the fifth indicator (red) comes on, the engine
■ i-VTEC indicator has reached its maximum output.
i-VTEC Indicator
Comes on when the i-VTEC system switches
the low RPM cams to the high RPM cams. When all the indicators are on, the tachometer
reading is on the verge of entering into the red zone.
■ Rev indicators
Instrument Panel

Come on when the tachometer reading

approaches the red zone on a scale of one to
six.
Rev Indicators

78 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display *

Information Display *
The information display shows the odometer, trip meter, engine oil life and 1Switching the Display
maintenance service item codes, and other gauges. Each time you press the knob, the information
display changes as follows:
■ Switching the Display Average Fuel A
Press the (Select/Reset) knob to change the display. Trip Meter A, Odometer

Instrument Panel
Average Fuel B
Trip Meter B, Odometer

Engine Oil Life

Range
Trip Meter A, Odometer

■ Odometer
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.

■ Trip Meter 1Trip Meter

Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A
pressing the knob.
and B can be used to measure 2 separate trips.

■ Resetting a trip meter

To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the knob. The trip meter is
reset to 0.0.

* Not available on all models Continued 79

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuGauges and Displays uInformation Display *

■ Average Fuel Economy

Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg or l/100 km.
The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel
economy is also reset.

■ Engine Oil Life

Instrument Panel

Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.

2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 257

■ Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy of your trips in the past.

■ Check Fuel Cap

Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not installed.
2 Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 338

80
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuGauges and Displaysuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) *

intelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) *

The i-MID shows the odometer, trip meter, outside temperature indicator, and other 1Switching the Display
gauges. To change the item displayed on the fuel
It also displays important messages such as warnings and other helpful information. consumption screen:
1. Press and hold the button until the item
blinks.
2. Press the button to select an item while the
■ Switching the Display item is blinking for about six seconds.

Instrument Panel
The display is fixed when the time elapses and
Press the (display/information) button to change the display. blinking stops.

1.8 ℓ models 2.4 ℓ models

123456 123456 123456 123456

Song AAA
200 Genre AAA
Artist AAA
24.0 24.0

Fuel consumption Audio/HFL display Fuel consumption Average fuel

123456 123456 123456 123456

Elapsed Time 1h 30m 200

Average Speed 40mph Range 200miles

(Display/ Elapsed time Range Full size analogue clock/ Average speed Range
Information) Wallpaper
Button
2.4 ℓ models
Press . 123456 123456 123456

Average Speed 40mph

Elapsed Time 1h 30m
Press and hold
. Average speed Blank screen Power monitor Elapsed time

* Not available on all models Continued 81

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuGauges and Displays uintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) *

■ Trip computer
Press the (Select/Reset) knob to change the display.

123456 123456 123456

Instrument Panel

24.0
B

40 40 30

A 123.4 B 12.3
Odometer Trip A Trip B
Outside temperature

(Select/
Reset) Knob

■ Odometer
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated. 1Trip Meter
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
■ Trip Meter pressing the knob, or by using the customized
features on the i-MID.
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A
2 Customized Features P. 85
and B can be used to measure 2 separate trips.

■ Resetting a trip meter

To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the knob. The trip meter is
reset to 0.0.
82
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuGauges and Displaysuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) *

1Average Fuel Economy

■ Average Fuel Economy
You can change when to reset the average fuel
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg or l/100 km. economy.
The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel 2 Customized Features P. 85
economy is also reset.
2.4 ℓ engine models
You can choose an item to be displayed in the fuel

Instrument Panel
consumption screen. Average fuel economy, range,
elapsed time, or average speed can be selected.
2 Customized Features P. 85
2 Switching the Display P. 81

1Range
■ Range
1.8 ℓ engine models
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is You can choose an item to be displayed in the fuel
estimated from the fuel economy of your trips in the past. consumption screen. Range, elapsed time, or average
speed can be selected.
2 Customized Features P. 85
2 Switching the Display P. 81

■ Elapsed Time
Shows the time elapsed since the last time Trip A or Trip B was reset.

■ Average Speed
Shows the average speed in mph or km/h since the last time Trip A or Trip B was
reset.

■ Engine Oil Life

Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 257
Continued 83
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuGauges and Displays uintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) *

1Outside Temperature
■ Outside Temperature
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada). Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can
affect the temperature reading when your vehicle
■ Adjusting the outside temperature display speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading
seems incorrect. It may take several minutes for the display to be
Instrument Panel

Use the i-MID’s customized features to correct the temperature. updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
2 Customized Features P. 85

■ Instant Fuel Economy *

Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.

■ Power Monitor * 1Power Monitor *

Engine horsepower is affected by external conditions
Engine horsepower usage while driving is
such as driving conditions, or vehicle condition. The
displayed in the power monitor. power monitor can compensate for some of these
variables, but different readings may be displayed.
100% indicates that horsepower is at its
maximum.

■ Turn-by-Turn Directions * 1Turn-by-Turn Directions *

Shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination linked with the You can select whether the turn-by-turn display
navigation system. comes on during the route guidance.
2 Refer to the navigation system manual 2 Customized Features P. 85

84 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuGauges and Displaysuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) *

1Customized Features
■ Customized Features
To customize other features, press the (+ / (-
Use the i-MID to customize certain features. button.
2 List of customizable options P. 88
■ How to customize 2 Example for customizing wallpapers P. 92
Select the Vehicle Menu screen by pressing the MENU button while the ignition
switch is in ON (w , and the vehicle is at a complete stop. Select Customize

Instrument Panel
Settings, then press the SOURCE button.

SOURCE Button
(+ Button
Press to set your selection.
Press to scroll upwards.
Button
Button SOURCE
Press to go to the next
Press to go back to the display.
previous display.
MENU MENU Button
(- Button
Press to go to Vehicle Menu.
Press to scroll downwards.

Continued 85
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuGauges and Displays uintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) *

■ Customization flow 1Customized Features

Press the MENU button. You can exit the customizing screen at any time by
Vehicle Menu pressing the MENU button.
Vehicle Information
Instrument Panel

Maintenance info

Odometer/Trip Meter
Trip Meter Reset

Select Trip/Odometer
Adjust Clock

86
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuGauges and Displaysuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) *

Customize Settings
Select Wallpaper
Import Wallpaper
Delete Wallpaper
Trip Meter Item to Display
Display Setup
Welcome Screen
Color Theme

Instrument Panel
Turn by Turn Display *
Language Selection
Adjust Outside Temp. Display

Trip A Reset with Refuel

Trip Computer Setup
Display km/miles

Fuel Efficiency Backlight *

Interior Light Dimming Time

Lighting Setup Headlight Auto Off Timer

Auto Light Sensitivity *

Auto Door Lock
Door Lock Mode
Door Setup Auto Door Unlock
Keyless Lock Acknowledgment
Security Relock Timer

Default All
* Not available on all models Continued 87
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuGauges and Displays uintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) *

■ List of customizable options

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable settings
Vehicle
Maintenance info Resets the Maintenance MinderTM. No/Yes
Information
Trip Meter Reset Resets the trip meter. Trip A/Trip B
Instrument Panel

Odometer/
Trip Meter Switches between odometer, trip meter A, and trip
Select Trip/Odometer ODO*1/Trip A/Trip B
meter B.
Adjust Clock Sets time display 12 hour or 24 hour and adjust the time. 12 h*1/24 h

*1: Default Setting

88
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuGauges and Displaysuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) *

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable settings

Select Selects the full-size analogue clock or the wallpaper. Clock*2/Image 1/Image 2/
Wallpaper Image 3

Import Three images can be stored.

Imports an image file for a new wallpaper. 2 Importing Wallpapers
Wallpaper

Instrument Panel
from USB P. 92

Delete Deletes an image file for a wallpaper. Image 1/Image 2/Image 3

Wallpaper
1.8 ℓ engine models
Range*2/Elapsed time/
Selects an item to be displayed along with average Average speed
Trip Meter fuel economy.
Customize Display Item to
Settings Setup Display 2.4 ℓ engine models
Average Fuel*2/Range/
Selects an item to be displayed along with the Elapsed time/Average speed
instant fuel economy.

Welcome Selects whether the welcome screen comes on or

Screen not when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w . On*2/Off

Color Theme Changes the color of the screen. Blue*3/Red*4/Amber/Gray

Turn by Turn Selects whether the turn-by-turn display comes on

Display*1, *5 On*2/Off
or not during the route guidance.
Language Changes the displayed language. English*2/French/Spanish
Selection

*1: Not available on all models

*2: Default Setting
*3: Default Setting for 1.8 ℓ engine models
*4: Default Setting for 2.4 ℓ engine models
*5: Refer to the navigation system manual for complete details.
Continued 89
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuGauges and Displays uintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) *

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable settings

Adjust
Outside -5°F ~ ±0°F*2 ~ +5°F (U.S.)
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
Temp. -3°C ~ ±0°C*2 ~ +3°C (Canada)
Display
Instrument Panel

Trip Trip A Reset Sets Trip A and the average fuel economy to reset
On/Off*2
Computer with Refuel when you refuel.
Setup Display km/
Changes the displayed measurement on the i-MID. Auto*2/km/miles
miles

Fuel
Customize
Efficiency Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. On*2/Off
Settings
Backlight
Interior Light
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay
Dimming 60sec/30sec*2/15sec
on after you close the doors.
Time
Lighting Headlight
Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay
Setup Auto Off 60sec/30sec/15sec*2/0sec
on after you close the driver’s door.
Timer
Auto Light
Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. Max/High/Mid*2/Low/Min
Sensitivity*1

*1: Not available on all models

*2: Default Setting

90
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuGauges and Displaysuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) *

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable settings

Auto Door Changes the setting for the automatic locking Off/With Vehicle Speed*1/
Lock feature. Shift from P
Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to
Door Lock
unlock on the first operation of the remote or Driver Door*1/All Doors

Instrument Panel
Mode
ignition key.
Off/Driver Door with Shift to P*2/
Auto Door Changes the setting for when the doors unlock All Doors with Shift to P/Driver
Door
Unlock automatically. Door with IGN Off*3/All Doors
Setup
Customize with IGN Off
Settings
Keyless Lock
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
Acknowledg- On*1/Off
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
ment
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock
Security
and the security system to set after you unlock the 90sec/60sec/30sec*1
Relock Timer
vehicle without opening any door.

Default Cancels/Resets all the customized settings Cancel

All asdefault. Reset All Defaults

*1:Default Setting
*2:Default Setting for automatic transmission
*3:Default Setting for manual transmission

Continued 91
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuGauges and Displays uintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) *

■ Example for customizing wallpapers 1Customized Features

You can customize the display from clock to wallpaper. • When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
in the USB flash drive’s root directory. Images in a
folder cannot be imported.
• The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
• The individual file size limit is 2 MB.
Instrument Panel

• The maximum image size is 1,920 x 936 pixels. If

the image size was less than 480 x 234 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
• Up to 255 files can be selected.
• The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
Importing Wallpapers from USB
You can import up to three images, one at a time for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
Select Import Wallpaper from Customize Settings and properly connect a USB
flash drive to store an image.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the adapter
cable.
2 USB Adapter Cable * P. 151
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Select Customize Settings with the (+ /
(- button, then press the SOURCE
button.
4. Select Display Setup with the (+ / (-
button, then press the SOURCE button.

92 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuGauges and Displaysuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) *

5. Select Import Wallpaper with the (+ / (-

button, then press the SOURCE button.
u The file names are displayed on the
screen.

Instrument Panel
6. Press the (- button until the file name you
want to store appears on the center of the
display, then press the SOURCE button.

7. The preview of the imported data is

displayed. Press the SOURCE button if it is
OK.
8. Press the SOURCE button to save the
image file.

Save

Continued 93
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuGauges and Displays uintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) *

9. Select the location you want to store the

image file in with the (+ / (- button,
then press the SOURCE button.

10. Press the MENU button to exit the

customize screen.
Instrument Panel

94
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuGauges and Displaysuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) *

Selecting a Wallpaper
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select Customize Settings with the (+ /
(- button, then press the SOURCE button.
3. Select Display Setup with the (+ / (-
button, then press the SOURCE button.
4. Select Select Wallpaper with the (+ / (-

Instrument Panel
button, then press the SOURCE button.

5. Select the image file you want with the

(+ / (- button, then press the SOURCE
button.
u When the scroll is stopped, the
thumbnail is displayed.
6. Press the MENU button to exit the
customize screen.

95
 Main Menu Table of Contents

96
 Main Menu

Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.

Setting the Clock ................................ 98 Opening and Closing the Moonroof * ...... 116 Adjusting the Mirrors
Locking and Unlocking the Doors Operating the Switches Around the Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 126
Key Types and Functions .................... 99 Steering Wheel Power Door Mirrors ......................... 126
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Ignition Switch................................. 117 Adjusting the Seats .......................... 127
Outside .......................................... 101 Turn Signals ..................................... 118 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Light Switches.................................. 118 Items
Inside ............................................. 103 Fog Lights * ...................................... 121 Interior Lights .................................. 135
Childproof Door Locks ..................... 104 Daytime Running Lights ................... 121 Interior Convenience Items .............. 136
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking * ........ 105 Wipers and Washers ........................ 122 Heating and Cooling *
Opening and Closing the Trunk....... 109 Brightness Control ........................... 123 Using Vents, Heating and A/C * ........ 142
Security System Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Climate Control System *
Immobilizer System .......................... 112 Button ........................................... 124 Using Automatic Climate Control .... 146
Security System Alarm * .................... 112 Adjusting the Steering Wheel........... 125 Automatic Climate Control Sensors ......148
Opening and Closing the Windows..... 114

* Not available on all models 97

 Main Menu Table of Contents

Setting the Clock

Clock
Models without navigation system 1Clock
You can adjust the time in the clock display, using the CLOCK knob with the ignition Models with navigation system
switch in ON (w . The clock is automatically updated through the
navigation system, so the time does not need to be
adjusted.
■ Adjusting the Time
1. Press the CLOCK knob to access the clock Models with i-MID
adjustment mode screen. You can customize the clock display to show the 12
hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2. Turn the CLOCK knob to adjust the hours.
2 Customized Features P. 85
3. Press the CLOCK knob. The display
Controls

switches to minute adjustment. Models with information display

4. Turn the CLOCK knob to adjust the You cannot adjust the time while the vehicle is
minutes. moving.
5. Press the CLOCK knob to complete clock
CLOCK Knob
adjustment.

On i-MID

On information display

98
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Key Types and Functions
This vehicle comes with the following key: 1Key Types and Functions
All of the keys have an immobilizer system. The
■ Master Keys immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle
theft.
Use the keys to start and stop the engine, to 2 Immobilizer System P. 112
Black lock and unlock the doors and to open the
trunk. You can also use the remote The keys contain precision electronics.
transmitter * to lock and unlock the doors and Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to
the electronics:
to open the trunk.
• Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in

Controls
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
• Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
• Keep the keys away from liquids.
• Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine
may not start, and the remote transmitter may not
work.
If the keys do not work properly, have them
inspected by a dealer.

* Not available on all models Continued 99

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions

1Valet Key
■ Valet Key
When you need to leave a key with a third party,
Can be used to start and stop the engine, and leave the valet key.
Gray lock and unlock driver's door.
Controls

■ Key Number Tag 1Key Number Tag

Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a
Contains a number that you will need if you safe place outside of your vehicle.
purchase a replacement key. If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a
dealer.

If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine,
contact a dealer.

100
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

1Using the Remote Transmitter *
■ Using the Remote Transmitter *
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
■ Locking the doors unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter,
Press the lock button. the doors will automatically relock.
Once: You can change the relock timer setting.
LED uSome exterior lights flash, all the doors 2 Customized Features P. 85
lock, and the security system sets.
If the interior light switch is in the door activated
Lock Twice (within five seconds after the first position, the interior lights come on when you press
Unlock Button push): the unlock button.
Button uA beeper sounds and verifies the security No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30

Controls
system is set. seconds.
Doors relocked with the remote: The lights go off
■ Unlocking the doors immediately.
2 Interior Lights P. 135
Press the unlock button.
Once: The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so
uSome exterior lights flash twice, and the the operating range may vary depending on the
driver's door unlocks. surroundings.
Twice:
uThe remaining doors unlock. The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is
open.

If the distance at which it works varies, the battery is

probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 307

Models with i-MID

You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features P. 85

* Not available on all models Continued 101

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key

■ Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
Models with remote transmitter
Fully insert the key and turn it. When you lock the driver's door with a key, all the
other doors lock at the same time. When unlocking,
the driver's door unlocks first. Turn the key a second
time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining
Lock doors.

Models with i-MID

Unlock
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features P. 85
Controls

1Locking a Door Without Using a Key

■ Locking a Door Without Using a Key
Models with remote transmitter
■ Locking the driver's door When you lock the driver's door, all the other doors
Models with remote transmitter lock at the same time.
Push the lock tab forward a or push the Make sure you have the key in your hand before
master door lock switch in the lock direction locking the door to prevent it from being locked in
b, and close the door. the vehicle.

Models without remote transmitter

Pull and hold the outside door handle, then
push the lock tab forward a.
Release the handle, then close the door.

■ Locking the passenger's doors

Push the lock tab forward and close the door.
Models with remote transmitter
■ Lockout prevention system
The doors cannot be locked when the key is in the ignition switch, and any door is open.

102
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

1Using the Lock Tab
■ Using the Lock Tab
Models with remote transmitter
■ Locking a door When you lock the door using the lock tab on the
To Lock Lock Tab Push the lock tab forward. driver's door, all of the other doors lock at the same
time.
■ Unlocking a door When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the
Pull the lock tab rearward. driver's door, only the driver's door will unlock.
To Unlock

Controls
1Unlocking Using the Inner Handle of Front Doors
■ Unlocking Using the Inner Handle of Front Doors
The inner front door handles are designed to allow
Pull the front door inner handle. front seat occupants to open the door in one motion.
uThe door unlocks and opens in one However this feature requires that front seat
Inner motion. occupants never pull a front door inner handle while
Handle the vehicle is in motion.

Children should always ride in a rear seat where

childproof door locks are provided.
2 Childproof Door Locks P. 104

Continued 103
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks

■ Using the Master Door Lock Switch * 1Using the Master Door Lock Switch *
When you lock/unlock the driver's door using the
Press the master door lock switch in as shown master lock switch, all the other doors lock/unlock at
to lock or unlock all doors. the same time.
To Lock

To Unlock

Master Door
Controls

Lock Switch

Childproof Door Locks

1Childproof Door Locks
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside
To open the door from the inside when the
regardless of the position of the lock tab. childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the
unlock position, lower the rear window, put your
■ Setting the Childproof Door Locks hand out of the window, and pull the outside door
handle.
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock
position, and close the door.

■ When opening the door

Open the door using the outside door handle.
Unlock

Lock

104 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking *

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking *

Your vehicle locks all doors and unlocks the driver’s door automatically when a 1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking *
certain condition is met. Models without i-MID
You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the master door lock
■ Auto Door Locking switch.
■ Drive lock mode 2 Customizing the Auto Door Locking/
All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h). Unlocking Setting * P. 106

Models with i-MID

■ Auto Door Unlocking You can turn off or change to another auto door

Controls
Models with automatic transmission locking/unlocking setting using the i-MID.
■ Park unlock mode 2 Customized Features P. 85
The driver’s door unlocks when the shift lever is moved into (P with the brake pedal
depressed.

Models with manual transmission

■ Ignition switch unlock mode
The driver’s door unlocks when the ignition switch is moved out of ON (w .

The settings can be changed to unlock all doors.

* Not available on all models 105

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting *

Customizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*

You can customize the auto door locking/unlocking setting to your liking using the master door lock switch.

■ List of the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Customizable Options

■ Auto door locking
Mode Description
Drive Lock Mode *1
All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
Models with
automatic transmission
All doors lock when the shift lever is moved out of (P .
Controls

Park Lock Mode

Off The auto door locking is deactivated all the time.

■ Auto door unlocking

Mode Description
Models with Driver’s door unlocks *2 All doors unlock
automatic transmission
Park Unlock Mode When the shift lever is moved into (P with the brake pedal depressed.

Ignition Switch Unlock Driver’s door unlocks All doors unlock

*3

Mode When the ignition switch is moved out of ON (w .

Off The auto door unlocking is deactivated all the time.

*1: Default setting
*2: Default setting for automatic transmission models
*3: Default setting for manual transmission models

106 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting *

■ Customizing Flow for Auto Door Locking Options

Models with automatic transmission
Steps Drive Lock Mode*1 Off
Park Lock Mode

Apply the parking brake. Apply the parking brake.

Apply the parking brake.
1 Models with automatic transmission Models with automatic transmission
Move the shift lever to (P .
Move the shift lever out of (P . Move the shift lever to (P .

2 Close the driver’s door. Open the driver’s door.

Controls
3 Turn the ignition switch to ON (w . Turn the ignition switch to ON (w .

Press and hold the front of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door for more
than five seconds. Release the switch after you hear a click twice.

Press and hold the front of the master

door lock switch on the driver’s door for
4
more than five seconds. Release the switch
after you hear one click.

Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q within 20 seconds.

5
uCustomization is completed.
*1: Default setting

Continued 107
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting *

■ Customizing Flow for Auto Door Unlocking Options

Models with automatic transmission
Ignition Switch Unlock Mode
Park Unlock Mode
Steps Off
To unlock driver’s To unlock driver’s
door*1 To unlock all doors door*2 To unlock all doors

Apply the parking brake. Apply the parking brake.

Apply the parking brake.
1 Models with automatic transmission Models with automatic transmission
Move the shift lever to (P .
Move the shift lever out of (P . Move the shift lever to (P .
Controls

2 Close the driver’s door. Open the driver’s door.

3 Turn the ignition switch to ON (w . Turn the ignition switch to ON (w .

Press and hold the rear of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door for more than five seconds. You will hear a click twice.

Keep pressing the switch Keep pressing the switch

5 Release the switch. for another five seconds Release the switch. for another five seconds Release the switch.
to hear one more click. to hear one more click.

Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q within 20 seconds.

6
uCustomization is completed.
*1: Default setting for manual transmission models
*2: Default setting for automatic transmission models
108
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Opening and Closing the Trunk

Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk
■ Opening the trunk
Open the trunk all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the trunk lid may begin to close under its own weight.

■ Closing the trunk

Keep the trunk lid closed while driving to:
uAvoid possible damage.
uPrevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 62

Controls
Using the Trunk Opener
Pulling the trunk release to the lower left of
the driver's seat unlocks and opens the trunk.

Trunk
Release

Continued 109
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Master key *

■ Locking the trunk opener 1Locking the trunk opener

You can lock the trunk release with the master If you need to give the key to someone else, give
key. them the valet key.
Controls

Using the Master key *

1Using the Master key *
Insert the key in the cylinder to unlock and
open the trunk. The valet key does not unlock the trunk.

Unlock

110 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Remote Transmitter *

Using the Remote Transmitter *

Press the trunk release button * for
approximately one second to unlock and open
Trunk the trunk.
Button

Controls
Emergency Trunk Opener
1Emergency Trunk Opener
The trunk release lever allows you to open the
Parents should decide if their children should be
trunk from inside for your safety.
Lever shown how to use this feature.

Slide the release lever in the direction of the

arrow.

* Not available on all models 111

 Main Menu Table of Contents

Security System
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from 1Immobilizer System
starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic NOTICE
signals to verify the key. Leaving the ignition key in the vehicle can result in
theft or accidental movement of the vehicle.
Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch: Always take the ignition key with you whenever you
• Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch. leave the vehicle unattended.
• Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
• Do not bring a key from another vehicle's immobilizer system near the ignition
Doing so may damage the system and make your
switch. vehicle inoperable.
Controls

Security System Alarm *

1Security System Alarm *
The security system alarm activates when the doors, trunk, or hood are opened
The security alarm continues for a maximum of two
without the key, or remote transmitter.
minutes until the security system deactivates.

■ When the security system alarm activates

The horn sounds intermittently and all of the exterior lights flash.

■ To deactivate the security system alarm

Unlock the vehicle using the key, or remote transmitter. The system, along with the
horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.

112 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm *

■ Setting the security system alarm 1Security System Alarm *

The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have Do not set the security system alarm when someone
been met: is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can
• The ignition switch is in LOCK (0 , and the key has been removed from the accidentally activate when:
ignition switch. • Unlocking the door with the lock tab.
• The hood and trunk are closed. • Opening the trunk with the trunk release or the
emergency trunk opener.
• All doors are locked with the key or the remote transmitter.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the
■ When the security system alarm sets security system alarm, the security alarm may go off
The security system indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the blinking

Controls
once the battery is recharged or replaced.
interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system is set. If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by
unlocking a door using the key or remote transmitter.
■ To cancel the security system alarm
Do not attempt to alter this system or add another
The security system is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the key or remote device to it.
transmitter, or the ignition switch is turned to ON (w . The security system indicator
goes off at the same time.

■ Panic Mode
■ The PANIC button on the remote
PANIC transmitter
Button If you press the PANIC button for
approximately one second, the following will
occur for about 30 seconds:
• The horn sounds.
• Some exterior lights flash.

■ Canceling panic mode

Press any button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to ON (w .
* Not available on all models 113
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Opening and Closing the Windows

Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON 1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
(w , using the switches on the doors. The driver's side switches can be used to open
and close all of the windows. 3 WARNING
Closing a power window on someone's
The power window lock button on the driver's side must be switched off (not hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than
the driver's seat. Make sure your passengers are away from
the windows before closing them.
When the power window lock button is pushed in, the indicator comes on and you
Controls

can only operate the driver's window. Turn the power window lock button on when The power windows can be operated for up to 10
children are in the vehicle. minutes after you turn the ignition switch off.
Opening either front door cancels this function.

■ Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function * Auto Reverse

■ Automatic operation If a power window senses resistance when closing
On automatically, it will stop closing and reverse
To open: Push the switch down firmly.
Off direction.
Power Window To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
Lock Button The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled
Driver’s The window opens or closes completely. To when you continuously pull up the switch.
Window stop the window at any time, push or pull the
Switch Indicator switch briefly. The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
Front Passenger’s
Window Switch ■ Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly.

Release the switch when the window reaches

the desired position.

114 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

■ Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function

To open: Push the switch down.
Close
To close: Pull the switch up.

Release the switch when the window reaches

the desired position.
Open

Controls
115
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Opening and Closing the Moonroof *

1Opening/Closing the Moonroof

■ Opening/Closing the Moonroof
You can only operate the moonroof when the ignition switch is in ON (w . Use the 3 WARNING
switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof. Opening or closing the moonroof on
■ Automatic operation someone's hands or fingers can cause
To open: Pull the switch back firmly, then serious injury.
Open
release.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
release. the moonroof before opening or closing it.
Controls

Tilt
Close The moonroof will automatically open or close
NOTICE
all the way. To stop the moonroof midway, Opening the moonroof in below freezing
touch the switch briefly. temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice
can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
■ Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back, and hold it The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10
until the desired position is reached. minutes after you turn the ignition switch off.
Opening either front door cancels this function.
To close: Push the switch forward, and hold it
until the desired position is reached. When resistance is detected, the auto reverse
function causes the moonroof to change directions,
■ Tilting the moonroof up then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully
switch. closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then are clear of the moonroof.
release.

116 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel

Ignition Switch
1Ignition Switch
Manual transmission models

(0 LOCK: Insert and remove the key in this

3 WARNING
position. Removing the key from the ignition switch
while driving locks the steering. This can
(q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position. cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

(w ON: This is the position when driving. Remove the key from the ignition switch
only when parked.

Controls
(e START: This position is for starting the engine.
The switch returns to ON (w when you let go of
Automatic transmission models
the key.
You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is
in (P .

All models
If you open the driver's door when the key is in LOCK
(0 or ACCESSORY (q , a warning buzzer will sound
to remind you to take the key out.
When this happens, the following messages appear
on the i-MID *:
• In LOCK (0 : REMOVE KEY.
• In ACCESSORY (q : RETURN IGNITION SWITCH
TO LOCK (0) POSITION The buzzer will stop when
you take the key out.
If the key won't turn from LOCK (0 to ACCESSORY
(q , turn the key while moving the steering wheel left
and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing
the key to turn.

* Not available on all models 117

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals

Turn Signals
The turn signals can be used when the ignition
Right Turn
switch is in ON (w .

■ One-touch turn signal

When you lightly push up or down and release
the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals
Left Turn and turn signal indicator blink three times.
This feature can be used when signaling for a
lane change.
Controls

Light Switches
1Light Switches
■ Manual Operation If you remove the key from the ignition switch while
the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s
Rotating the light switch turns the lights on
High Beams door is opened.
and off, regardless of the position of the
ignition switch. When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the
■ High beams instrument panel will be on.
Push the lever forward until you hear a click. 2 Lights On Indicator P. 72
■ Low beams
When in high beams, pull the lever back to Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off
Flashing the high beams because it will cause the battery to discharge.
return to low beams.
Low Beams
■ Flashing the high beams If you sense that the level of the headlights is
Turns on parking, side marker,
tail, and rear license plate lights Pull the lever back, and release it. abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Turns on headlights, parking, side
marker, tail, and rear license plate
lights

118
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

1Automatic Lighting Control *

■ Automatic Lighting Control *
We recommend that you turn on the lights manually
Automatic lighting control can be used when when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas
the ignition switch is in ON (w . such as long tunnels or parking facilities.

When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the The light sensor is in the location shown below.
headlights and other exterior lights will switch Do not cover this light sensor with anything;
otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not
on and off automatically depending on the
work properly.
ambient brightness.
uYou can change the auto light sensitivity

Controls
Light Sensor
setting.
2 Customized Features P. 85

Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:

The exterior lights come on
Setting
when the ambient light is at
MAX
Bright
HIGH
MID
LOW
Dark
MIN

* Not available on all models Continued 119

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

■ Headlight Integration with Wiper * 1Headlight Integration with Wiper *

This feature activates while the headlights are off in
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within AUTO.
a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO. The instrument panel brightness does not change
The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped. when the headlights come on.

At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting

■ Automatic Lighting Off Feature control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off the number of wiper sweeps.
within 15 seconds after you remove the key and close the driver's door.
Controls

uYou can change the headlight auto off timer setting.

2 Customized Features P. 85

If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 with the headlight switch on, but do not
open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the switch is in
the AUTO position).

The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver's door. If you unlock
the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the
driver's door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.

120 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights *

Fog Lights *
When the low beam headlights are on, turn 1Fog Lights *
the fog light switch on to use the fog lights. When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
They go off when the headlights turn off, or when
the daytime running lights are on.
2 Fog Light Indicator * P. 72

Fog Light Switch

Controls
Daytime Running Lights
The high beam headlights come on slightly dimmer than normal when the following
conditions have been met:
• The ignition switch is in ON (w .
• The headlight switch is off, or in .
• The parking brake is released.

The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition
switch will turn off the daytime running lights.

The high beam headlights return to the original brightness once the headlight
switch is turned on.

* Not available on all models 121

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

Wipers and Washers

The windshield wipers and washers can be 1Wipers and Washers
used when the ignition switch is in ON (w . NOTICE
Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.
■ MIST The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber
The wipers run at high speed until you release blades will get damaged.
Pull to
use the lever.
NOTICE
washer.
In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the
■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT, LO, HI) windshield, becoming stuck.
Change the wiper switch setting according to Operating the wipers in this condition may damage
the wipers. Use the defroster to warm the
Controls

Intermittent Time the amount of rain. windshield, then turn the wipers on.
Adjustment Ring *
■ Adjusting the delay * Models with adjustment ring
MIST Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are
operating intermittently, the length of the wipe
OFF delay. interval shortens. When the vehicle starts moving, the
INT: Low speed with wipers make a single sweep.
Long delay When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s shortest
intermittent
delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become the same.
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe All models
Short delay Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.
The pump may get damaged.

The wiper motor is equipped with a breaker that may

■ Washer stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you. overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a
When you release the lever, the wipers make few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal.
two or three more sweeps before stopping. If the wipers stop operating due to any obstacle such as
the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place.

Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and turn the ignition

switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 , then remove
the obstacle.

122 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control

Brightness Control
When the parking lights are turned on and the 1Brightness Control
ignition switch is in ON (w , you can use the Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on
brightness control knob to adjust instrument whether the exterior lights are on or off. The
panel brightness. instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are
Brighten: Turn the knob to the right. on.
Dim: Turn the knob to the left.
Pressing the (Select/Reset) knob or the
(display/information) button * switches the display.
You will hear the beeper when the brightness
Control Knob
reaches minimum or maximum. The If you turn the knob to the right until the brightness

Controls
information display */i-MID * will return to its display is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels
original state several seconds after you adjust the reduced instrument panel brightness when the
the brightness. parking lights are on.

The brightness can be set differently for when the

■ Brightness level indicator
On i-MID exterior lights are on, and when they are off.
The brightness level is shown on the
information display */i-MID * while you are
adjusting it.

On information display

* Not available on all models 123

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button

Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window 1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button
and mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON (w . NOTICE
Models with heating and cooling system When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors careful not to damage the heating wires.
automatically switch off after 20 minutes. It is critical to wipe the window from side to side
along the defogger heating wires.

This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off

when the window has been defogged.
Also, do not use the system for a long period when
Controls

the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery,

making it difficult to start the engine.
Models with climate control system
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors
automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes
depending on the outside temperature.
However, if the outside temperature is 32°F
(0°C) or below, they do not automatically
switch off.

124 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel

Adjusting the Steering Wheel

The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you 1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up. 3 WARNING
To adjust
u The steering wheel adjustment lever is Adjusting the steering wheel position while
under the steering column. driving may cause you to lose control of the
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
in or out.
u Make sure you can see the instrument Adjust the steering wheel only when the
panel gauges and indicators. vehicle is stopped.

Controls
3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever
To lock Lever down to lock the steering wheel in position. Make any steering wheel adjustments before you
u After adjusting the position, make sure start driving.
you have securely locked the steering
wheel in place by trying to move it up,
down, in, and out.

125
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Adjusting the Mirrors

Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving 1Adjusting the Mirrors
position. Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and
adjusted for best visibility.
■ Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
Flip the tab to switch the position. 2 Adjusting the Seat Positions P. 127
Tab
Up The night position will help to reduce the glare
from headlights behind you when driving
after dark.
Controls

Daytime
Position
Down
Night Position

Power Door Mirrors

You can adjust the door mirrors when the
ignition switch is in ON (w .

■ Mirror position adjustment

L/R selector switch: Select the left or right
mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the
Selector switch to the center position.
Adjustment Switch
Mirror position adjustment switch: Press
Switch
the switch left, right, up, or down to move the
mirror.

126
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Adjusting the Seats

Adjusting the Seat Positions
Adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible 1Adjusting the Seats
Allow sufficient
while allowing you to maintain full control of
space.
the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright, 3 WARNING
well back in the seat and be able to Sitting too close to a front airbag can result
adequately press the pedals without leaning in serious injury or death if the front
forward, and grip the steering wheel airbags inflate.
comfortably. The passenger's seat should be
adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far Always sit as far back from the front
Move back. back from the front airbag in the dashboard airbags as possible while maintaining
control of the vehicle.

Controls
as possible.

■ Adjusting the driver’s power seat * The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow
at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the
Horizontal Position steering wheel and the chest.
Adjustment
Always make seat adjustments before driving.

Height Adjustment
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment

* Not available on all models Continued 127

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

■ Adjusting the front manual seat(s) 1Adjusting the front manual seat(s)
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and
Height Adjustment forth to make sure it is locked in position.
(Driver side only)
Pull up or push down the lever
to raise or lower the seat.
Controls

Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Pull up the lever to
Horizontal Position change the angle.
Adjustment Driver’s seat is shown.
Pull up on the bar to move the
seat, then release the bar.

128
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

1Adjusting the Seat-Backs

■ Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Adjust the driver's seat-back to a comfortable, 3 WARNING
upright position, leaving ample space Reclining the seat-back too far can result in
between your chest and the airbag cover in serious injury or death in a crash.
the center of the steering wheel.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,
The front seat passenger should also adjust and sit well back in the seat.
their seat-back to a comfortable, upright
position.

Controls
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the
seat-back and your back.

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag
occupant's chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the operation.
chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a
seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury. If you cannot get far enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some type of adaptive
equipment may help.

Continued 129
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

1Adjusting the Head Restraints

■ Adjusting the Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints 3 WARNING
in all seating positions. Improperly positioning head restraints
reduces their effectiveness and increases
Head restraints are most effective for the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
protection against whiplash and other rear-
impact crash injuries when the center of the Make sure head restraints are in place and
back of the occupant's head rests against the positioned properly before driving.
Position head in the center center of the restraint. The tops of the
Controls

of the head restraint.

occupant's ears should be level with the For a head restraint system to work properly:
center height of the restraint. • Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
■ Adjusting the front head restraint positions • Do not place any object between an occupant and
To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. the seat-back.
To lower the head restraint: Push it down • Install each restraint in its proper location.
while pressing the release button.

130
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

■ Changing the Rear Seat Head Restraint Positions

A passenger sitting in a back seating position
should adjust the height of their head restraint
to an appropriate position before the vehicle
begins moving.
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release

Controls
button.

■ Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints 1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair. 3 WARNING

Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the
To remove a head restraint:
head restraints can result in severe injury
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the
during a crash.
restraint up and out.
Always replace the head restraints before
To reinstall a head restraint: driving.
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height
while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked
in position.

Continued 131
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

■ Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their 3 WARNING
seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their Sitting improperly or out of position can
seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is result in serious injury or death in a crash.
off.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat,
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if with your feet on the floor.
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly
Controls

increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or
fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.

132
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats

Rear Seats
1Folding Down the Rear Seats
■ Folding Down the Rear Seats
The rear seat-back(s *) can be folded down to
1. Remove the center shoulder belt from the accommodate bulkier items in the trunk.
Guide
guide.
Never drive with the seat-back folded down and the
trunk lid open.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 62

To lock the seat-back upright, push it backwards until

Center it locks.
Shoulder

Controls
When returning a seat-back to its original position,
Belt push it firmly back. Also, make sure all rear shoulder
2. Pull the release lever in the trunk to release belts are positioned in front of the seat-back, and the
the lock. center shoulder belt is re-positioned in the guide.
Release
Lever *
Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press
against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the
weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work
improperly.
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 48

Release Lever Also make sure all items in the trunk or items
3. Fold the seat-back down. extending through the opening into the rear
seats are properly secured. Loose items can fly
forward if you have to brake hard.
If the rear head restraints get caught on the
front seat-backs, remove the head restraints. The front seat(s) must be far enough forward so they
2 Removing and Reinstalling the Head do not interfere with the rear seats as they fold
Restraints P. 131 down.

* Not available on all models 133

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest

Armrest
■ Using the Front Seat Armrest
The console lid can be used as an armrest.
To adjust *:
Slide the armrest to desired position.
Controls

■ Using the Rear Seat Armrest *

Pull down the armrest in the center seat-back.

134 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items

Interior Lights
1Interior Light Switches
■ Interior Light Switches
In the door activated position, the interior lights fade
Front ■ ON out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are
The interior lights come on regardless of closed.
whether the doors are open or closed. The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following
Off
■ Door activated situations:
The interior lights come on in the following • When you unlock the driver's door but do not open
it.
situations:
• When you remove the key from the ignition switch
Door Activated Position • When any of the doors are opened. but do not open a door.
• You unlock the driver's door.

Controls
Models with i-MID
Rear Door Activated Position • You remove the key from the ignition You can change the interior lights dimming time.
On switch. 2 Customized Features P. 85
■ OFF
All models
Off The interior lights remain off regardless of
The interior lights go off immediately in the following
whether the doors are open or closed.
situations:
• When you lock the driver's door.
• When you close the driver's door with the key in
the ignition switch.
• When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w .
■ Map Lights *
The map lights can be turned on and off by If you leave any of the doors open without the key in
pressing the lenses. the ignition switch, the interior lights go off after
about 15 minutes.

1Map Lights *
When the ceiling light switch is in the door activated
position and any door is open, the map light will not
go off when you press the lens.

* Not available on all models 135

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Interior Convenience Items

1Glove Box
■ Glove Box
Pull the handle to open the glove box. 3 WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury
to your passenger in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat belt.

Always keep the glove box closed while

driving.
Controls

■ Console Compartment
Pull the handle to open the console
compartment.

136
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Center Pocket
Press on the upper edge to open the pocket.

Controls
Continued 137
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

1Beverage Holders
■ Beverage Holders
NOTICE
■ Front seat beverage holders
Spilled liquids damage the upholstery, carpeting, and
Are located in the console between the front electrical components in the interior.
seats.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.
Hot liquid can scald you.
Controls

■ Rear seat beverage holders *

Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat
beverage holders.

138 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

1Accessory Power Sockets

■ Accessory Power Sockets
NOTICE
The accessory power sockets can be used when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY
Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter
(q or ON (w . element.
■ Accessory power socket (console panel) This can overheat the power socket.
Open the cover to use it.
Models with tire repair kit
NOTICE
Do not operate the tire repair kit compressor for
more than 15 minutes. The accessory power socket

Controls
and compressor can overheat and become
permanently damaged.

Accessory power socket (console panel)

■ Accessory power socket (console The accessory power socket is designed to supply
compartment) * power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 180
Open the console lid and the cover to use it. watts or less (15 amps).

Accessory power socket (console compartment) *

The accessory power socket is designed to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 120
watts or less (10 amps).

To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket

with the engine running.

Models with rear accessory power socket

When both sockets are being used, the combined
power rating of the accessories should not exceed
180 watts (15 amps).

* Not available on all models Continued 139

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

1Coat Hook
■ Coat Hook
The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy
There is a coat hook on the rear left grab items.
handle. Pull it down to use it.
Controls

140
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

1Seat Heaters *
■ Seat Heaters *
The ignition switch must be in ON (w to use 3 WARNING
the seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats Heat induced burns are possible when
faster than the LO setting. using seat heaters.

Persons with a diminished ability to sense

temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat

Controls
heaters.
While in HI, the heater cycles on and off.
uThe appropriate indicator will be on Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
while the seat heater is on. Briefly press engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
the switch on the opposite side to turn be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
the heater off. The indicator will be off.
When a comfortable temperature is In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and
reached, select LO to keep the seat does not automatically turn off.
warm.

* Not available on all models 141

 Main Menu Table of Contents

Heating and Cooling *

Using Vents, Heating and A/C *

A/C (Air Conditioning) Button * Mode Buttons

Press to cool the interior or dehumidify Change airflow.
while heating.
Dashboard vents
Dashboard and floor vents
Floor vents
Fan Control Dial Floor and defroster vents
Adjusts the fan speed.
Rotate the dial all the
way to OFF to turn
everything off.
Controls

Temperature Control Dial

Adjusts the interior temperature.

Windshield Defroster
Button * Button
Turns on the A/C, selects airflow Turns on the A/C, selects airflow
from the dashboard vents, and from the defroster vents at the
switches the mode to recirculation. base of the windshield, and
switches the mode to fresh air.
(Recirculation) Button
Press the button and switch the mode
depending on environmental conditions. Models without
A/C button
Recirculation Mode (indicator on):
Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior (Recirculation) Button
through the system. Recirculates air from the vehicle’s
interior through the system.
Fresh Air Mode (indicator off):
(Fresh Air) Button *
Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system
Maintains outside ventilation. Keep
in fresh air mode in normal situations.
the system in fresh air mode in
normal situations.

142 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuHeating and Cooling * uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C *

1Heating
■ Heating
When you select , the mode automatically
Models with A/C button Models without A/C button switches to fresh air.

Controls
The heater uses engine coolant to warm the air.
1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control dial.
2. Select .
3. Adjust the temperature using the temperature control dial.
1To rapidly warm up the interior
■ To rapidly warm up the interior
Change to fresh air mode as soon as the interior gets
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.
warm enough. The windows may fog up if kept in
2. Select . recirculation mode.
3. Set the temperature to maximum warm.
4. Press the button (the indicator on).

■ To dehumidify the interior *

When used in combination with the heater, the air conditioning system makes the
interior warm and dry and can prevent the windows from fogging up.
1. Turn the fan on.
2. Press the A/C button to turn on the air conditioning.

* Not available on all models Continued 143

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuHeating and Cooling * uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C *

1To rapidly cool down the interior

■ Cooling *
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control more rapidly by partially opening the windows.
dial.
2. Select . While in the ECON mode, the system has greater
3. Adjust the temperature using the temperature fluctuations.
temperature control dial.
Pressing the button bypasses the ECON mode
4. Press the A/C button (the indicator on).
control, and cools down the interior more rapidly.

■ To rapidly cool down the interior

Controls

1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.

2. Set the temperature to maximum cool.
3. Press the button (the indicator on).

144 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuHeating and Cooling * uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C *

1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

■ Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
Models with A/C button Models without A/C button through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.

Controls
Pressing the button turns the air conditioning system on and automatically
switches the system to fresh air mode.
1To rapidly defrost the windows
■ To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed. After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode.
2. Press the button. If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the
3. Press the button. windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes
4. Set the temperature to maximum warm. visibility.

145
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Climate Control System *

Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select. 1Using Automatic Climate Control
The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that will as quickly as If any buttons are pressed while using the climate
possible, raise or lower the interior temperature to your preference. control system in auto, the function of the button
that was pressed will take priority.
Temperature (ON/OFF)
Control Dial Button The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions
unrelated to the button that were pressed will be
Fan Control controlled automatically.
Dial
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the
Controls

AUTO Button fan may not start immediately when the AUTO
button is pressed.
(Recirculation) Button

A/C (Air Conditioning) Button If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows,
turning the system on AUTO, and setting the
temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to
recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
Dashboard Floor and
Dashboard
and floor Floor vents defroster
vents When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
vents vents
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.

Use the system when the engine is running.

1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the temperature control dial.
3. Press the (ON/OFF) button to cancel.

146 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control

■ Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes 1Using Automatic Climate Control
Press the (recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on Pressing the button switches the climate control
environmental conditions. system between on and off. When turned on, the
Recirculation Mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through system returns to your last selection.
the system.
While in the ECON mode, the climate control system
Fresh Air Mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in
has greater temperature fluctuations.
fresh air mode in normal situations.

1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

■ Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

Controls
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
Pressing the (windshield defroster) button
through all the windows before driving.
turns the air conditioning system on and
automatically switches the system to fresh air Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
mode. limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
Press the button again to turn off, the windshield may fog up.
system returns to the previous settings.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.

■ To rapidly defrost the windows

1. Press the button. 1To rapidly defrost the windows
2. Press the button. After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode,
the windows may fog up from humidity. This
impedes visibility.

147
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuClimate Control System * uAutomatic Climate Control Sensors

Automatic Climate Control Sensors

Sunlight Sensor The automatic climate control system is
equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill
any liquid on them.
Controls

Sensor

148
 Main Menu

Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.

Audio System Models with i-MID Audio Error Messages

About Your Audio System................ 150 Audio System Basic Operation ...... 156 CD Player......................................... 175
USB Adapter Cable * ........................ 151 Audio Remote Controls.................... 157 iPod®/USB Flash Drive ...................... 176
Auxiliary Input Jack .......................... 151 Adjusting the Sound ........................ 158 Pandora® ......................................... 177
Audio System Theft Protection * ....... 152 Playing AM/FM Radio....................... 159 General Information on the Audio
Playing a CD .................................... 162 System
Models with information display Playing an iPod®............................... 165 Recommended CDs ......................... 178
Audio System Basic Operation ...... 153 Playing Internet Radio ...................... 168 Compatible iPod® and USB Flash Drives....180
Adjusting the Sound ........................ 153 Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 170 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® *
Playing AM/FM Radio ....................... 154 Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 173 Using HFL ........................................ 181
Playing a CD .................................... 155 HFL Menus ...................................... 183

* Not available on all models 149

 Main Menu Table of Contents

Audio System
About Your Audio System
On models with navigation system, see the Navigation System Manual for operation 1About Your Audio System
of the audio system, Bluetooth®HandsFreeLink®, and voice commands for these Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not
features. supported.

Models with information display iPod® and iPhone® are registered trademarks owned
by Apple Inc.
The audio system features AM/FM radio. It can also play CDs and WMA/MP3 files.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel. MP3 and AAC are standard audio compression
formats. WMA is an audio compression format
Models with i-MID developed by Microsoft Corporation.
The audio system features AM/FM radio. It can also play audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC
files, iPod®, iPhone®, USB flash drives, and Bluetooth® devices *. State or local laws may limit the circumstances in
which you can launch or control your attached audio
device.
Features

You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, or
the remote controls on the steering wheel.

iPod®

USB Flash
Remote Control Drive

150 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAudio SystemuUSB Adapter Cable *

USB Adapter Cable *

1USB Adapter Cable *
1. Unclip the USB connector and loosen the • Do not leave the iPod® or USB flash drive in the
adapter cable. vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
2. Install the iPod® dock connector or the USB damage it.
flash drive to the USB connector. • Do not use an extension cable with the USB
adapter cable.
• Do not connect the iPod® or USB flash drive using a
hub.
• Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be
damaged.
• We recommend backing up your data before using
the device in your vehicle.
Auxiliary Input Jack • Displayed messages may vary depending on the
Use the jack to connect standard audio devices. device model and software version.

Features
1. Open the AUX cover.
If the audio system does not recognize the iPod®, try
2. Connect a standard audio device to the reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To
input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo reboot, follow the manufacturer's instructions
miniplug. provided with the iPod® or visit www.apple.com/
u The audio system automatically switches ipod.
to the AUX mode.
1Auxiliary Input Jack
To switch the mode, press any of the audio mode
buttons. You can return to the AUX mode by
pressing the AUX button.

You cannot use the auxiliary input jack if you replace

the audio system.

* Not available on all models 151

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection *

Audio System Theft Protection *

The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as 1Audio System Theft Protection *
when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. Find the audio system's security code and serial
number label in your owner’s manual kit.
Models with i-MID
■ Reactivating the audio system We recommend that you write down the serial
number in this owner’s manual.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w , and turn on the audio system.
u If you turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q , you will be requested to Do not store the label in your vehicle. If you lose the
enter the audio security code. See step 3. label, you must first retrieve the serial number, and
2. Press and hold the power button again for more than two seconds. then obtain the code.
u The audio system is reactivated when the system’s control unit recognizes that
the system is in your vehicle. You can find out about your serial number and
If the control unit fails to recognize, ENTER CODE appears on the i-MID. security code from a dealer.
Features

3. Enter the audio security code using the preset buttons. If you enter an incorrect
U.S. models
digit, continue to the last digit, then try again. If you do not enter code correctly You can register the security code at Owner Link
after 10 tries, leave the system for one hour before trying again, or visit a dealer (owners.honda.com.), and find information on how
to have the system reset. to retrieve the serial number and obtain the code at
radio-navicode.honda.com.
Models with information display
■ Entering the audio security code
ENTER CODE appears on the display when the power is reconnected.
1. Turn on the audio system.
2. Enter the audio security code using the preset buttons. If you enter an incorrect
digit, continue to the last digit, then try again. If you do not enter the code
correctly after 10 tries, leave the system for one hour before trying again, or visit
a dealer to have the system reset.

152 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

Audio System Basic Operation

Models with information display

To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or
ON (w .

Adjusting the Sound 1Adjusting the Sound

Press the TUNE/SOUND knob, and rotate it When the adjustment level reaches the center, you
to adjust the setting. will see C in the display.

The SVC has four modes: OFF, LOW, MID, and

HIGH.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As

Features
you slow down, audio volume decreases.
TUNE/SOUND Knob
Each time you press the TUNE/SOUND knob,
a sound mode switches as follows.

BASS is selectable.

Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation

153
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Playing AM/FM Radio

1Playing AM/FM Radio
VOL/PWR TUNE/SOUND Knob
(Volume/Power) Rotate to the right to tune to a The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
Knob higher frequency, and turn it to stereo FM broadcasts.
Press to turn the the left to tune to a lower Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
audio system on frequency.
and off. You can store six AM stations and twelve FM stations
Turn to adjust FM Button into the preset button memory. FM1 and FM2 let you
the volume. AM Button store six stations each.
Press to select a
band.
A.SEL function scans and stores up to six AM stations
and twelve FM stations with a strong signal into the
preset button memory.

If you do not like the stations auto select has stored,

Features

you can manually store your preferred frequencies.

/ (SEEK/SKIP)
Buttons
Press to search up and down
the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.

Preset Buttons (1-6) A.SEL (Auto Select) SCAN Button

To store a station: Button Press to sample
1. Tune to the selected Press to scan both each of the
station. bands and store the strongest stations
2. Pick a preset button and strongest station in on the selected
each preset. To turn off band for 10
hold it until you hear a
auto select, press the seconds. To turn
beep. button again. This off scan, press the
To listen to a stored station, restores the presets you button again.
select a band, then press the originally set.
preset button.

154
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs, and CD-RWs in either MP3 or WMA 1Playing a CD
format. With the CD loaded, press the CD/AUX button. NOTICE
VOL/PWR (Volume/Power) Knob CD Slot Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.
Press to turn the audio system on and off. Insert a CD about halfway
Turn to adjust the volume. into the CD slot.
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(CD Eject) Button TUNE/SOUND
(DRM) cannot be played.
Press to eject a CD. Knob
The audio system displays FORMAT, then skips to
Rotate to skip to
the next file.
CD/AUX the next folder,
Button and to skip to the
beginning of the Text data appears on the display under the following
Press to
play a CD. previous folder in circumstances:
MP3 or WMA. • When you select a new folder, file, or track.
• When you change the audio mode to CD.

Features
SCAN Button
• When you insert a CD.
/ (SEEK/SKIP) You will get a 10-second
Buttons sampling of each song.
● Press to sample all
The display shows up to 10 characters of text data.
Press or to Press and hold the DISP button to see additional
change tracks (files in tracks on the CD (all
characters. > indicates that the text data continues.
MP3 or WMA). files in the current
The display goes back to the previous screen if you
folder in MP3 or
DISP Button press and hold the button again.
WMA).
Press to display the text ● Press two times to
data on a CD (if it was If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
sample the first file in
recorded with text data). the system reloads the CD automatically after several
each of the main
RDM (Random) Button seconds.
folders (MP3 or WMA).
● Press to play all tracks/files on
● To turn off scan, press
a CD in random order. and hold the button.
● Press two times to play all files RPT (Repeat) Button
in the current folder (MP3 or ● Press to replay a track/file continuously.

WMA) in random order. ● Press two times to replay all files in the

● To turn off random, press and current folder (MP3 or WMA).

hold the button. ● To turn off repeat, press and hold the button.

155
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Audio System Basic Operation

Models with i-MID 1Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or These indications are used to show how to operate
ON (w . the selector knob.
Use the selector knob or SETUP button to Rotate to select.
access some audio functions. Press to enter.

Press to switch between the normal and Press the SOURCE, (+ , (- , or button on the
extended display for some functions. steering wheel to change any audio setting.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 157
Button
Selector SETUP SETUP Menu Items
Knob Button 2 Auto Select P. 160
2 RDS Information P. 161
Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll 2 Sound Settings P. 158
Features

Menu Display
through the available choices. Press to set 2 Play Mode P. 164
your selection. 2 Resume/Pause P. 174
Sound Settings
SETUP button: Press to select any mode such
as Auto Select, RDS Information, Sound
Settings, Play Mode, and Resume/Pause.
button: Press to go back to the
previous display.

156
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio Remote Controls

Audio Remote Controls

Allows you to operate the audio system while driving. 1Audio Remote Controls
SOURCE Button SOURCE Button The CD mode appears only when a CD is loaded.
Cycles through the audio modes as follows:
FM1 FM2 AM CD AUX When in the AUX mode, the following are operable
Button from the remote controls:
(+ Button
(+ (- (Volume) Buttons • iPod®/USB flash drive connected to the USB
Button adapter cable
(- Button Press (+ : To increase the volume. • Bluetooth® Audio (with some phones only)
Press (- : To decrease the volume.

Buttons
• When listening to the radio

Features
Press : To select the next preset radio station.
Press : To select the previous preset radio station.
Press and hold : To select the next strong station.
Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.
• When listening to a CD, iPod®, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
• When listening to a CD or USB flash drive
Press and hold : To skip to the next folder.
Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.
• When listening to Pandora® *
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press and hold : To select the next station.
Press and hold : To select the previous station.

* Not available on all models 157

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Sound

Press the SETUP button, and rotate to 1Adjusting the Sound
select Sound Settings, then press . Rotate The SVC has four modes: OFF, LOW, MID, and
HIGH.
to scroll through the following choices:
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.

Selector SETUP
Knob Button
Features

Auto Select
Subwoofer *

Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation

TREBLE is selectable.

158 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Playing AM/FM Radio

/ Button (Power) Button

Press to display and select an Press to turn the audio
RDS category. system on and off.
75°F 002300 miles

Features
SCAN Button Preset Buttons (1-6)
Press to sample each of the To store a station:
strongest stations on the 1. Tune to the selected station.
selected band for 10 seconds. 2. Pick a preset button and hold it
To turn off scan, press the until you hear a beep.
button again.
To listen to a stored station, select a
FM Button band, then press the preset button.
AM Button
Press to select a band. Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to tune the radio
frequency.

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons SETUP Button

Press to search up and down the Press to display menu items.
selected band for a station with
a strong signal.

Continued 159
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

1Playing AM/FM Radio

■ Auto Select
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
Use the auto select feature to scan both bands and store the strongest station in stereo FM broadcasts.
each preset. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Auto Select, then Switching the Audio Mode
press . Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
Sound Settings 2 Audio Remote Controls P. 157
To turn off auto select, press again. This You can store six AM stations and twelve FM stations
restores the presets you originally set. into the preset button memory. FM1 and FM2 let you
store six stations each.

Auto Select function scans and stores up to six AM

Features

stations and twelve FM stations with a strong signal

into the preset button memory.

If you do not like the stations auto select has stored,

you can manually store your preferred frequencies.

160
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Radio Data System (RDS)

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station.

■ RDS Information
1. Press the SETUP button and rotate to
select RDS Information.
2. Each time you press , the RDS
Information switches between on and off.

Features
■ To find an RDS station from your selected program category
RDS Category 1. Press the / button to display and
select an RDS category.
Jazz
2. Use SEEK/SKIP or SCAN to select an RDS
station.
####-FM

161
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3 or WMA
format. With the CD loaded, press the CD button.

SCAN Button
You will get a 10-second
sampling of each song.
● Press to sample all tracks (Power) Button
on the CD (all files in the Track AAA Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
current folder in MP3 or 1’23’’
WMA).
● Press two times to sample
Genre AAA
the first file in each of the Artist AAA
CD Slot
main folders (MP3 or Insert a CD about halfway into the
75°F 002300 miles
Features

WMA). CD slot.
● To turn off scan, press and

hold the button.

CD Button
Press to play a CD.

(CD Eject) Button

/ Button Press to eject a CD.
Press to skip to the
next folder, and to skip to
the beginning of the previous Selector Knob
folder in MP3 or WMA. Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons SETUP Button

Press or to change Press to display menu items.
tracks (files in MP3 or WMA).

162
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

1Playing a CD
■ How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
(MP3/WMA) NOTICE
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
1. Press to switch the display to a folder list. cause the CD to jam in the unit.

WMA files protected by digital rights management

Track AAA
(DRM) cannot be played.
1’23’’
Genre AAA The audio system displays Unsupported, then skips
Artist AAA to the next file.

75°F 002300 miles Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
• When you select a new folder, file, or track.
• When you change the audio mode to CD.

Features
Folder Selection
2. Rotate to select a folder. • When you insert a CD.

Folder BBB If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
Folder CCC the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.
Folder AAA

Track Selection
3. Press to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
Track BBB
4. Rotate to select a file, then press .
Track CCC
Track AAA

Continued 163
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

1How to Select a Play Mode

■ How to Select a Play Mode
Press the button to go back to the previous
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a track or file. display, and press the SETUP button to cancel this
1. Press the SETUP button. setting mode.

Play Mode Menu Items

Sound Settings Normal Play
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current track/file(s).
Repeat One Folder (MP3/WMA): Repeats all files in
the current folder.
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA): Plays all files in the
current folder in random order.
Play Mode Random in Disc: Plays all tracks/files in random
Items order.
Features

2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press

.
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

■ To turn off a play mode

1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .
3. Rotate to select Normal Play, then press .

164
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

Playing an iPod®
Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB adapter cable, then press
the AUX button.
2 USB Adapter Cable * P. 151

123456
USB Indicator
Song AAA Comes on when an iPod® is
Album Art connected.
Genre AAA
Artist AAA

Features
/ Button (Power) Button
Press to go back to the Press to turn the audio
previous display. system on and off.
Press to set your selection.

AUX Button
Press to select iPod® (if connected).

Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons SETUP Button

Press or to change Press to display menu items.
songs.

* Not available on all models Continued 165

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

1Playing an iPod®
■ How to Select a File from the iPod® Menu
Available operating functions vary on models or
1. Press to display the iPod® menu. versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
123456
Song AAA If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the i-MID.
Genre AAA 2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 176
Artist AAA

iPod® Menu
Features

2. Rotate to select a menu.

3. Press to display the items on that menu.

4. Rotate to select an item, then press .
All
Artist AAA
Artist BBB

166
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAudio System Basic Operationu

1How to Select a Play Mode

■ How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file. Normal Play
1. Press the SETUP button. Shuffle Off: Turns off the shuffle mode.
Shuffle: Plays all available files in a selected list
(playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or
Sound Settings composers) in random order.
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
Repeat Off: Turns off the repeat mode.
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current track.
Play Mode
Items

Features
2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press
Normal Play .
Shuffle Off 3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
Shuffle

■ To turn off a play mode

1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .
3. Rotate to select Normal Play, then press .

Continued 167
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

U.S. models
iPhone® use only
Playing Internet Radio
Activate Pandora®, and connect the iPhone® using your dock connector to the USB
adapter cable, then press the AUX button.
2 USB Adapter Cable * P. 151

Rating Icon

Album Art
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Features

AUX Button
/ Button Press to select iPhone® (if connected
when the Pandora® application is
Press to the next station. activated).
Press to the previous station.
Skip Button
Press to skip a song.

Selector Knob SETUP Button

Turn to adjust the volume. Press to enter Press to display menu items.
PANDORA MENU. Press and turn to select
an item, then press to set your selection.

168 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

1Playing Internet Radio

■ Pandora® Menu
Pandora® is a personalized Internet radio service that
You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio selects music based on an artist, song, or genre a user
system. The available items are: enters, and streams what is likely to be of interest.
• Station List (QuickMix is also available)
• Like To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
• Dislike must first be installed on your iPhone®. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.
• Resume/Pause
• Skip If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio
• Bookmark this song system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth®
• Bookmark this artist Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio
system is selected.
■ Operating a menu item

Features
1. Press to display the PANDORA MENU. 1Pandora® Menu
2. Rotate to select a menu. Available operating functions vary on software
3. Press to display the items on that menu. versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the i-MID.
2 Pandora® P. 177

There are restrictions on the number of songs you

can skip or dislike in a given hour.

169
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Playing a USB Flash Drive

Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB adapter cable, then press the AUX button.
2 USB Adapter Cable * P. 151

123 456
USB Indicator
File AAA Comes on when a USB flash drive
1’23’’ is connected.
/Button Genre AAA
Press to skip to the Artist AAA
next folder, and to skip to
Features

the beginning of the previous 75°F 002300 miles

folder.
(Power) Button
SCAN Button Press to turn the audio
You will get a 10-second system on and off.
sampling of each file.
AUX Button
● Press to sample all files in
Press to select USB flash drive
the current folder. (if connected).
● Press two times to sample

the first file in each of the

Selector Knob
main folders.
● To turn off scan, press and
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to select an item, then
hold the button.
press to set your selection.
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons SETUP Button
Press or to change files. Press to display menu items.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes® are playable on this unit.

170 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
1. Press to switch the display to a folder list. 2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 178
123 456
File AAA Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
1’23’’ management (DRM) are not played.
Genre AAA The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
Artist AAA skips to the next file.
75°F 002300 miles
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the i-MID.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 176
Folder Selection

Features
2. Rotate to select a folder.

121:Folder BBB
122:Folder CCC
123:Folder AAA

Track Selection
3. Press to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
454:File BBB 4. Rotate to select a file, then press .
455:File CCC
456:File AAA

Continued 171
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

1How to Select a Play Mode

■ How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file(s). Normal Play
1. Press the SETUP button. Repeat One Track: Repeats the current file.
Repeat One Folder: Repeats all files in the current
folder.
Sound Settings Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder
in random order.
Random All: Plays all files in random order.

Play Mode
Items
Features

2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press

.
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

■ To turn off a play mode

1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .
3. Rotate to select Normal Play, then press .

172
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth®-compatible 1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
phone. Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system. For a list of compatible phones:
2 Phone Setup P. 188 • U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
123456 Bluetooth Indicator
Comes on when In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
File AAA your phone is device functions while driving.
connected to HFL.
Genre AAA
Artist AAA If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there will be a delay before the system begins to play.

Features
(Power) Button Selector Knob
Press to turn the Turn to adjust the
audio system on volume.
and off. Press to display the
device’s name.

AUX Button
Press to select
Bluetooth® Audio.
/ (Seek/Skip) SETUP Button
Buttons
Press to display
Press or to menu items.
change files.

Continued 173
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
connected to HFL. instructions.
2. Press the AUX button.
Sound Settings The pause function may not be available on some
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL- phones.
compatible phone, which is not compatible
If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input
for Bluetooth® Audio, may be already jack, you may need to press the AUX button
connected. repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing

■ To pause or resume a file from your phone.
Features

1. Press the SETUP button.

2. Rotate to select Resume/Pause, then press .
Each time you press , the setting switches between Pause and Resume.

■ Switching to HFL 1Switching to HFL

If you receive a call while Bluetooth® Audio is in the
Press the (pick-up) button on the steering pause mode, it will resume play after ending the call.
wheel to receive a call when Bluetooth® Audio
is playing.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * P. 181

Button Press the (hang-up/back) button to end

the call and return to Bluetooth® Audio.
Button

174 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

Audio Error Messages

CD Player
If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.
Error Message Cause Solution
● Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until
Heat Error*2 High temperature
the error message is cleared.
FORMAT*1 Track/file format not ● Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file
Unsupported*2 supported plays automatically.
BAD DISC
CHECK MANUAL ● Press the (eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the
PUSH EJECT*1 error message is cleared.
● Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the
Mechanical error

Features
Bad Disc disc again.
Please Check Owners Manual 2 Protecting CDs P. 179
Push Eject*2 ● If the error message reappears, press the button, and pull out
Mecha Error*2 the disc.
● Insert a different disc.
BAD DISC If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc.
CHECK MANUAL*1 ● If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed,
Servo error contact a dealer.
Bad Disc Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Please Check Owners Manual*2
● Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.
Check Disc*2 Disc error
2 Protecting CDs P. 179

*1:Models with information display

*2:Models with i-MID

175
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod®/USB Flash Drive

Models with i-MID

iPod®/USB Flash Drive
If an error occurs while playing an iPod®or USB flash drive, you may see the
following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message Solution
Appears when there is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Check if the device is compatible with the
USB Error
USB adapter unit.
Bad USB Device
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system
Please Check Owners
off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Manual.
No Song Appears when the iPod® is empty. Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Features

Appears when an unsupported iPod® is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod® is connected,
Unsupported Ver
update the iPod® software to the newer version.
Retry Connection Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod®. Reconnect the iPod®.

Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message
Unplayable File
appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.

Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
No Data
drive. Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is
Unsupported
connected, reconnect the device.

176
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®

U.S. models
Pandora®
If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages.
If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message Solution
PANDORA No Station Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device to create a station.
PANDORA Requires Update Appears when Pandora version is not supported. Please update the device application.

PANDORA Unavailable Appears when Pandora is performing system maintenance. Try again later.

PANDORA Cannot Connect Appears when Pandora is unable to play music. Check your device.

Features
PANDORA Loading... Appears when Pandora is loading.

177
 Main Menu Table of Contents

General Information on the Audio System

Recommended CDs
• Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use. 1Recommended CDs
• Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed. A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded
• Play only standard round-shaped CDs. under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not
play either.
The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.

■ CDs with MP3 or WMA files

• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
Features

• Some versions of MP3 or WMA formats may be unsupported.

178
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uRecommended CDs

■ Protecting CDs 1Protecting CDs

Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs: NOTICE
• Store a CD in its case when it is not being played. Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside
• When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge. and damage the audio unit.
• Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface.
• Never insert foreign objects into the CD player. Examples:
● Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and
• Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat. excessively thick CDs
• Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
• Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.
Bubbled/ With Label/ Using
Wrinkled Sticker Printer Label
Kit

Features
Sealed With Plastic Ring
● Damaged CDs ● Poor quality

CDs

Chipped/ Warped Burrs

Cracked
● Small CDs

3-inch
(8-cm)
CD

179
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod® and USB Flash Drives

Models with i-MID

Compatible iPod® and USB Flash Drives
1iPod® Model Compatibility
■ iPod® Model Compatibility This system may not work with all software versions
of these devices.
Model
iPod® (5th generation)
iPod classic® 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007)
iPod classic® 120GB (launch in 2008)
iPod classic® 160GB (launch in 2009)
iPod nano®
iPod touch®
iPhone® 3G/iPhone® 3GS/iPhone® 4/iPhone® 4S
Features

1USB Flash Drives

■ USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored
• Use a recommended USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher. order. This order may be different from the order
• Some digital audio players may not be compatible. displayed on your PC or device.
• Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
• Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.

180
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® *

Models with navigation system 1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® *

For models with the navigation system, see Navigation System Manual for how to To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
operate the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
Models without navigation system • U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using (888) 528-7876.
your vehicle's audio system, without handling your cell phone. • Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call (888)
528 -7876.

Using HFL Voice control tips

• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
■ HFL Buttons windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
Volume up Microphone • Press and release the button when you want to

Features
call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak
clearly and naturally after a beep.
• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
Pick-up the command may be misinterpreted.
Button • To change the volume level, use the audio system's
Volume
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the
down
steering wheel.
Hang-up/Back Button
PHONE State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
Talk Button Selector
Button handheld electronic devices while operating a
Knob
vehicle.

(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen or to answer an

incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag.
PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.
Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .
* Not available on all models Continued 181
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uUsing HFL

■ HFL Status Display 1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® *

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Bluetooth Indicator The i-MID notifies you when there is an The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
Comes on when your incoming call. trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
phone is connected to HFL.
use of such marks by Honda Motors Co., Ltd., is
Roam Status under license. Other trademarks and trade names are
Signal Strength those of their respective owners.
Battery Level Status
HFL Mode HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
John
1HFL Status Display
Features

The information that appears on the i-MID varies

between phone models.

You can change the system language to English,

Call Name French, or Spanish.
2 Customized Features P. 85

■ Limitations for Manual Operation

Certain manual functions are disabled or
inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until
the vehicle is stopped.

Only previously stored speed dial entries with

voice tags can be called using voice
commands while the vehicle is in motion.
Disabled Options 2 Speed Dial P. 198
182 * Not available on all models
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

HFL Menus
The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w to use HFL. 1HFL Menus
PHONE or To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-
compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
Phone is parked.
Speed Dial*1 Display your speed dial entry lists.
Some functions are limited while driving. A message
(up to 15 entries per paired phone) appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving
and the operation is canceled.

Call History*1 Dialed Calls Display the last 20

outgoing calls.

Received Calls Display the last 20

Features
incoming calls.

Missed Calls Display the last 20

missed calls.
Phonebook*1 Display the paired phone’s phonebook.

Dial*1 Enter a phone number to dial.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Continued 183
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

Redial*1 Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.

Select message and .

Message is
Text Message Read/Stop reading System reads received message aloud,
read aloud
or stop message from being read.

Reply Reply to a received message using one

of six fixed phrases.
Features

Call Make a call to the sender.

Display Message See an entire received message

(if more than three lines of text).

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

184
Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

Phone Setup Connection Add a New Phone Pair a phone to the system.

Connect a Phone Connect a phone to the system.

Disconnect Phone Disconnect a paired phone from the

system.

Features
Delete a Phone Delete a previously paired phone.

Pairing Code Create a code for a paired phone.

Continued 185
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

Add New
Speed Dial*1 Phonebook Select a phone number from the
phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Call History Select a phone number from the call history

to store as a speed dial number.

Phone Number Enter a phone number to store as a speed

Existing entry list dial number.
Features

Change Speed Dial Change a previously stored speed dial

number.

Delete Speed Dial Delete a previously stored speed dial

number.

Store Voice Tag Create a voice tag for a speed dial number.

Change Voice Tag Change a voice tag for a speed dial number.

Delete Voice Tag Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

186
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

Auto Transfer Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you
enter the vehicle.

Caller ID Info Name Priority Prioritize the caller’s name as the caller ID.

Number Priority Prioritize the caller’s phone number as

the caller ID.

Features
Passcode*1 Create a security PIN for a paired phone.

Message Notice Turn incoming text message notifications on or off.

System Clear Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries, and
security codes.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Continued 187
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

1Phone Setup
■ Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no phone paired to the system) HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
1. Press the PHONE button or the button. calls.
2. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
3. Make sure your phone is in search or Phone Pairing Tips:
discoverable mode, then press . • You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
u HFL automatically searches for a
• Up to six phones can be paired.
Bluetooth device. • Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
75°F 002300 miles paired to HFL.
• If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and returns to idle.
Features

4. When your phone appears on the list, select

Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
it by pressing .
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
u If your phone doesn’t appear, select right side.
PHONE#1
Phone Not Found? and search for These icons indicate the following:
Bluetooth devices using your phone. : The phone can be used with HFL.
From your phone, select : The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
HandsFreeLink.

5. HFL gives you a four-digit pairing code to

PHONE#1
input on your phone.
When your phone prompts you, input the
four-digit pairing code.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.

188
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To pair a cell phone (when a phone has already been paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
u If a prompt appears asking to connect to
a phone, select No and proceed with
step 2.
Connection
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
Speed Dial
press .
75°F 002300 miles

3. Rotate to select Connection, then

press .

Features
4. Rotate to select Add a New Phone,
Add a New Phone then press .
Connect a Phone
u The screen changes to Select Location.

5. Rotate to select Empty, then press .

PHONE#4

PHONE#5

Continued 189
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

6. Make sure your phone is in search or

discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.

75°F 002300 miles

7. When your phone appears on the list, select

it by pressing .
u If your phone doesn’t appear, select
Features

PHONE#2
PHONE#6 Phone Not Found? and search for
Bluetooth devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.

PHONE#2 8. HFL gives you a four-digit pairing code to

input on your phone.
When your phone prompts you, input the
four-digit pairing code.
9. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.

190
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To change the pairing code setting 1To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the PHONE button or the button. The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the
u Rotate to select Phone Setup, then setting.
press . To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the
current code, then enter a new one.
Connection
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you
Speed Dial pair a phone, select Random.
75°F 002300 miles

2. Rotate to select Connection, then

Features
press .
Delete a Phone 3. Rotate to select Pairing Code, then
Pairing Code press .

4. Rotate to select Fixed or Random,

then press .

Continued 191
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To delete a paired phone

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
Disconnect Phone u Repeat the procedure to select
Delete a Phone Connection, then Delete a Phone.
Pairing Code

75°F 002300 miles

3. Rotate to select a phone you want to

Features

delete, then press .

1 PHONE#3
2 PHONE#4
3 PHONE#5

4. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then
press .
u You will receive a notification on the
screen if it is successful.

192
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

1To Set Up a Text Message Notice Option

■ To Set Up a Text Message Notice Option
On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
1. Press the PHONE button or the button. receive a new text message.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then Off: The message you receive is stored in the system
press . without notification.

3. Rotate to select Message Notice, then

Features
press .

4. Rotate to select a mode you want, then

press .

Continued 193
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

1To Create a Security PIN

■ To Create a Security PIN
If the phone is already security PIN protected, you
You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN. need to enter the current security PIN before clearing
1. Press the PHONE button or the button. the PIN or creating a new one.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
PHONE#3 press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
PHONE#4
Passcode.
PHONE#5
3. Select a phone you want to add a security
75°F 002300 miles PIN to.
u Rotate to select a phone you want to
add a security PIN to, then press .
Features

4. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen.
u Rotate to select Yes, then press .

5. Enter a new four-digit number.

u Rotate to select, then press . Press
to delete. Press to enter the
security PIN.
6. Re-enter the four-digit number.
u The screen returns to the screen in step
2.

194
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically
transferred to HFL.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Transfer.
3. Rotate to select On, then press .
4. You will receive a notification on the screen
if the change is successful.

Features
1Caller’s ID Information
■ Caller’s ID Information
Name Priority mode: A caller’s name is displayed if it
You can select a caller’s information to be displayed when you have an incoming is stored in the phonebook.
call. Number Priority mode: A caller’s phone number is
1. Press the PHONE button or the button. displayed.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Caller ID
Info.
3. Rotate to select a mode you want, then
press .
4. You will receive a notification on the screen
if the change is successful.

Continued 195
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To Clear the System

Security codes, paired phones, all stored voice tag, all speed dial entries, and all
imported phonebook data are erased.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select System
Clear.
3. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
75°F 002300 miles
Features

4. You will receive a notification message on

the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then
press .

5. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen. Press to finish.

196
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History 1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
automatically imported to HFL. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.

John
Pref Fax
111111####
222222####
Home Car
333333####
Mobile Message

Features
Work Other

Pager Voice

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the

category icons to HFL.

The phonebook is updated after every connection.

Call history is updated after every connection or call.

Continued 197
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ Speed Dial 1Speed Dial

You can use the audio preset buttons during a call to
Up to 15 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone. store a speed dial number:
To store a speed dial number: 1. Press and hold the desired audio preset button
1. Press the PHONE button or the button. during a call.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then 2. The contact information for the active call will be
press . stored for the corresponding speed dial.
u Repeat the procedure to select Speed
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to
Dial, then Add New.
call the number using the voice tag.
75°F 002300 miles 3. Rotate to select a place to choose a
number from, then press .
By Phonebook:
u Select a number from the linked cell
Features

phone’s imported phonebook.

By Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
By Phone Number:
Phone Number u Input the number manually.
4. When the speed dial is successfully stored,
you are asked to create a voice tag for the
number. Rotate to select Yes or No,
then press .
5. Using the button, follow the prompts to
say the name for the speed dial entry.

198
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial number 1Speed Dial

1. Press the PHONE button or the button. Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
press . It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For
u Repeat the procedure to select Speed example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”
Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
4. Rotate to select Store Voice Tag, then
press .
5. Using the button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.

Features
Continued 199
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To delete a voice tag

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
Change Voice Tag u Repeat the procedure to select Speed
Delete Voice Tag Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
4. Rotate to select Delete Voice Tag,
then press .
u You will receive a confirmation message
on the screen. Rotate to select Yes,
then press .
Features

■ To delete a speed dial number

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Speed
Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
4. Rotate to select Delete Speed Dial,
then press .
u You will receive a confirmation message
on the screen. Rotate to select Yes,
then press .

200
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

1Making a Call
■ Making a Call
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported voice from any screen.
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial. Press the button and follow the prompts.

The maximum range between your phone and

vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of

the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.

Features
Continued 201
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using the imported phonebook 1To make a call using the imported phonebook
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook are automatically This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
imported to HFL. However, you can call a stored speed dial number
1. Press the PHONE button or the button. with a voice tag using voice commands.
2. Rotate to select Phonebook, then 2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 182
2 Speed Dial P. 198
Jane press .
John 3. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.
Rotate to select the initial, then press
Mat
.
4. Rotate to select a name, then press .
5. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
Features

John
111111####
222222####
333333####

202
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using a phone number 1To make a call using a phone number
1. Press the PHONE button or the button. This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
2. Rotate to select Dial, then press . However, you can call a stored speed dial number
3. Rotate to select a number, then press with a voice tag using voice commands.
012345#### . 2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 182
2 Speed Dial P. 198
4. Rotate to select , then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.

■ To make a call using redial

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

Features
2. Rotate to select Redial, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.

Continued 203
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using the call history 1To make a call using the call history
Call history is stored by Dialed Calls, Received Calls, and Missed Calls. The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or
1. Press the PHONE button or the button. missed calls.
2. Rotate to select Call History, then (Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)
press .
3. Rotate to select Dialed Calls, Received
Calls, or Missed Calls, then press .
4. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.

■ To make a call using a speed dial entry 1To make a call using a speed dial entry
Features

1. Press the PHONE button or the button. On the Phone screen, the first six speed dials on the
2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press list can be directly selected by pressing the
. corresponding audio preset buttons (1-6).
3. Rotate to select a number, then press
. Select More Speed Dial Lists to view another paired
phone’s speed dial list.
u Dialing starts automatically.
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to
call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 198

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by

voice from any screen.
Press the button and follow the prompts.

204
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

1Receiving a Call
■ Receiving a Call
Call Waiting
HFL Mode Caller Name When there is an incoming call, an audible
Press the button to put the current call on hold to
notification sounds (if activated) and the answer the incoming call.
Incoming Call screen appears. Press the button again to return to the current
John call.
Press the button to answer the call. Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer
Press the button to decline or end the call. it.
Press the button if you want to hang up the
current call.

Features
Continued 205
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

1Options During a Call

■ Options During a Call
Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
The following options are available during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer Call: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-
driven phone system.
1. To view the available options, press the
PHONE button.
0’50”
John
Features

0’50” 2. Rotate to select the option, then press

.
u The check box is checked when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

206
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

1Receiving a Text Message

■ Receiving a Text Message
The system does not display any received messages
HFL can display newly received text messages as well as 20 of the most recently while you are driving. You can only hear them read
received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud aloud.
and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new With some phones, you may be able to display up to
text message. 20 most recent text messages.
2. Rotate to select Yes to listen to the
Only the first three lines of the received message are
message, then press . displayed with this option.
u The text message is displayed. The 2 Displaying an entire message P. 211
system automatically starts reading out
the message. State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text
3. To discontinue the message read-out, press message feature. Only use the text message feature

Features
the button. when conditions allow you to do so safely.

Continued 207
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

1Displaying Messages
■ Displaying Messages
The icon appears next to an unread message.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Text Message, then Only the first three lines of the received message are
press . displayed with this option.
2 Displaying an entire message P. 211

If you delete a message on the phone, the message is

also deleted in the system. If you send a message
from the system, the message goes to your phone’s
outbox.

3. Rotate to select a message, then press

Features

.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.

208
Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ Using the stop reading or read option 1Using the stop reading or read option
1. Press the PHONE button or the button. This option changes to:
2. Rotate to select Text Message, then • Stop Reading while the text message is read out.
press . Select this option to discontinue the message read-
3. Rotate to select a message, then press out.
. • Read when you go to the Text Message menu, or
after you selected Stop Reading. Select this option
u The text message is displayed. The to hear the system reading out the selected
system automatically starts reading the message.
message aloud.
4. Press to enter the Text Message
Menu.
5. Rotate to select Stop Reading or

Features
Read, then press .

Continued 209
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ Reply to a message 1Reply to a message

You can reply to a message using one of the The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
six common phrases available in the system. • Talk to you later, I'm driving.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button. • I am on my way.
2. Rotate to select Text Message, then • I'm running late.
press . • OK
• Yes
3. Rotate to select a message, then press
• No
.
u The text message is displayed. The You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
system automatically starts reading out
the message. After you reply, the following is displayed:
4. Press to enter the Text Message
Features

Menu.
5. Rotate to select Reply, then press .
6. Rotate to select the reply message, then
press .
7. The reply message you selected is displayed.
Select Yes to send the message.

210
Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ Making a call to a sender

You can call the text message sender.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select to Text Message, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a message, then press
.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out
the message.
4. Press to enter the Text Message
Menu.
5. Rotate to select Call, then press .

Features
u HFL begins dialing.
■ Displaying an entire message
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select to Text Message, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a message, then press
.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out
the message.
4. Press to enter the Text Message
Menu.
5. Rotate to select Display Message,
then press .
6. Rotate to scroll down and display the
entire message.

211
 Main Menu Table of Contents

212
 Main Menu

Driving
This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories.

Before Driving Manual transmission models Parking Your Vehicle

Driving Preparation .......................... 214 Shifting.......................................... 229 When Stopped ................................ 245
Maximum Load Limit........................ 217 ECON Button * ................................. 232 Rearview Camera * ............................ 246
Towing a Trailer Cruise Control * ............................... 233 Refueling
Towing Preparation.......................... 219 VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC Fuel Information .............................. 247
Driving Safely with a Trailer .............. 221 (Electronic Stability Control), System ...... 236 How to Refuel ................................. 248
Towing Your Vehicle ........................ 222 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)... 238
Fuel Economy
When Driving Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) -
Improving Fuel Economy.................. 250
Starting the Engine .......................... 223 Required Federal Explanation ......... 239
Braking Accessories and Modifications
Precautions While Driving................. 225
Brake System ................................... 241 Accessories ...................................... 251
Automatic Transmission ................... 226
Automatic transmission models ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ........... 243 Modifications................................... 251
Shifting .......................................... 227 Brake Assist System.......................... 244

* Not available on all models 213

 Main Menu Table of Contents

Before Driving
Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.

■ Exterior Checks 1Exterior Checks

• Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior NOTICE
lights, or other parts of the vehicle. When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around
u Remove any frost, snow, or ice. the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force
u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of them open, as this can damage the rubber trim
around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.
further freezing.
u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components. Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.
• Make sure the hood is securely closed. You will be unable to insert key if the water freezes in
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked. the hole.
• Make sure the tires are in good condition.
u Check air pressure, check for damage and excessive wear. Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite
flammable materials left under the hood, causing a
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 297
Driving

fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended

• Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle. period, inspect and remove any debris that may have
u There are blind spots from the inside. collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have
fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a
small animal.
Also check under the hood for leftover flammable
materials after you or someone else has performed
maintenance on your vehicle.

214
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

1Interior Checks
■ Interior Checks
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
• Store or secure all items on board properly. need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle's heavy items in the trunk or tow a trailer, have the
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe. aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 217 technician.
• Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking.
• Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat *.
u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving.
• If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.
u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
• Securely close and lock all doors and the trunk.

Driving
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 103
• Adjust your seating position properly.
u Adjust the head restraint, too.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 127
2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 130
• Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving.
u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 126
2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 125

* Not available on all models Continued 215

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

• Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the
seats.
u They can interfere with the driver's ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
• Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 33
• Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the
vehicle, and go off soon after.
u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 66
Driving

216
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

Maximum Load Limit

The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg). 1Maximum Load Limit
See Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver's doorjamb.
3 WARNING
Label Example Overloading or improper loading
can affect handling and stability
and cause a crash in which you
can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this manual.

This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):
accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer. The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit - load.
2 Specifications P. 346, 348

Driving
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):
vehicle's placard. The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 346, 348
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs.
(1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
Continued 217
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being

loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.

In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,

accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Load Limits Example
Driving

Example1

Max Load Passenger Weight Cargo Weight

850 lbs 150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs 550 lbs
(385 kg) (68 kg x 2 = 136 kg) (249 kg)

Example2

Max Load Passenger Weight Cargo Weight

850 lbs 150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs 100 lbs
(385 kg) (68 kg x 5 = 340 kg) (45 kg)

218
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer

HF model
Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your
warranties.
Except HF model
Towing Preparation
1Towing Load Limits
■ Towing Load Limits
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper 3 WARNING
equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving.
■ Total trailer weight Exceeding any load limit or improperly
Maximum allowable weight of the trailer, loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a
cargo, and everything in or on it must not crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towing loads in killed.
excess of this can seriously affect vehicle Check the loading of your vehicle and
handling and performance and can damage trailer carefully before starting to drive.

Driving
the engine and drivetrain.

Total Load Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale.
If a public scale is not available, add the estimated
■ Tongue load weight of your cargo load to the weight of your
The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and the
trailer on the hitch should be approximately tongue load.
10% of the total trailer weight.
• Excessive tongue load reduces front tire Break-in Period
traction and steering control. Too little Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle's first 600
tongue load can make the trailer unstable miles (1,000 km).
and cause it to sway.
• To achieve a proper tongue load, start by Never exceed the gross weight ratings.
Tongue Load
Tongue Load loading 60% of the load toward the front Gross weight information
of the trailer and 40% toward the rear. 2 Vehicle Specifications P. 346, 348
Readjust the load as needed.

Continued 219
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation

1Towing Equipment and Accessories

■ Towing Equipment and Accessories
Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and
Towing equipment varies by the size of your trailer, how much load you are towing, maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/
and where you are towing. territory, and local regulations.

■ Hitches Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other

The hitch must be of an approved type and properly bolted to the underbody. items are recommended or required for your towing
situation.
■ Safety chains The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type
Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the and brand. If a connector is required, it should only
trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground. be installed by a qualified technician.

■ Trailer brakes
There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are
common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet. If you choose electric brakes,
be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to attach trailer brakes to
Driving

your vehicle's hydraulic system, as it will lower braking effectiveness and create a
potential hazard.

■ Additional towing equipment

Many states and provinces/territories require special outside mirrors when towing a
trailer. Even if mirrors are not required in your locale, you should install special
mirrors if visibility is restricted in any way.

■ Trailer light
Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and
local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the
requirements in the area where you plan to tow.

220
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer

Driving Safely with a Trailer

1Driving Safely with a Trailer
■ Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer
Parking
• Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition. In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel
• Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits. chocks at each of the trailer's tires.
2 Towing Load Limits P. 219
• Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer.
• Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while
driving.
• Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly.
• Check the pressures of the trailer tires, including the spare.

■ Towing Speeds and Gears

• Drive slower than normal.
• Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
Automatic transmission models

Driving
• Use the (D position when towing a trailer on level roads.

■ Turning and Braking

• Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal.
• Allow more time and distance for braking.
• Do not brake or turn suddenly.

Continued 221
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle

■ Driving in Hilly Terrain

• Closely watch your high temperature indicator. If the indicator remains on, turn
off the heating and cooling system */climate control system * and reduce speed.
Pull to the side of the road safely to cool down the engine if necessary.
Automatic transmission models
• Shift to the (d position if the transmission shifts frequently.

Towing Your Vehicle

Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs
to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 344
Driving

222 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

When Driving
Starting the Engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied. 1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.

The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in

thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).

When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all

electrical accessories such as the lights, heating and
Automatic transmission models cooling system */climate control system *, and rear
Brake Pedal
2. Check that the shift lever is in (P , then defogger in order to reduce battery drain.
depress the brake pedal.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
an engine block heater will improve starting and
in (N , it is safer to start it in (P . warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently
below -22°F (-30°C) are expected, the coolant

Driving
mixture should be changed to a higher concentration
to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.

Manual transmission models If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
Clutch Pedal smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
2. Check that the shift lever is in (N . Then
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
depress the brake pedal with your right the engine or exhaust system.
foot, and the clutch pedal with your left
foot.
u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed
to start the engine.
Brake Pedal

* Not available on all models Continued 223

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

3. Turn the ignition switch to START (e 1Starting the Engine

without depressing the accelerator pedal. Do not hold the key in START (e for more than 15
seconds.
• If the engine does not start right away, wait for at
least 10 seconds before trying again.
• If the engine starts, but then immediately stops,
wait at least 10 seconds before repeating step 3
while gently depressing the accelerator pedal.
Release the accelerator pedal once the engine
starts.

■ Starting to Drive The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from

theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is
Automatic transmission models used, the engine's fuel system is disabled.
1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that 2 Immobilizer System P. 112
the parking brake indicator has gone off.
2 Parking Brake P. 241
Driving

2. Put the shift lever in (D . Select (R when reversing.

3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.

224
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving

Precautions While Driving

1Precautions While Driving
■ In Rain
NOTICE
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or
Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the
driveline, or cause electrical component failure. accelerator pedal. You could damage the
transmission.
■ Other Precautions If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q or
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location. LOCK (0 while driving, the engine will shut down
and all steering and brake power assist functions will
Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.
stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.

Do not put the shift lever in (N , as you will lose

engine braking (and acceleration) performance.

During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,

avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so
as to not damage the engine or powertrain.

Driving
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).
You should also follow this when the brake pads are
replaced.
NOTICE
2.4 ℓ engine models
The following can damage the under spoiler:
• Parking the vehicle by a parking block
• Parallel parking along the road shoulder
• Driving towards the bottom of a hill
• Driving up or down to a different surface level
(such as a road shoulder)
• Driving on a rutted or bumpy road
• Driving on a road with potholes.

225
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuWhen DrivinguAutomatic Transmission

Automatic Transmission
■ Creeping
The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases.
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.

■ Kickdown
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the
transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress
the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.
Driving

226
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Automatic transmission models

Shifting 1Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs. You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 and
remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P .
■ Shift lever positions
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Park Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
Used when parking or starting the apply the parking brake.
Release Button engine
Reverse
Used when reversing
Neutral
Used when idling
Drive
Used for normal driving (gears change
between 1st and 5th automatically)

Driving
Drive (D3)
Used when:
● Going up or down hills

● Towing a trailer in hilly terrain

Second
Used to increase engine braking
(the transmission is locked in 2nd gear)
First
Used to further increase engine braking
(the transmission is locked in 1st gear)

Continued 227
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

1Shift Lever Operation

■ Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE
When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.

Tachometer's red zone Whichever position the shift lever is in when driving,
a blinking (D indicator indicates a transmission
problem.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
Depress the brake pedal and press
Driving

the shift lever release button to The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
shift. speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
Shift without pressing the shift lever slight jolt.
release button.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
Press the shift lever release button
and shift. button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.

228
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Manual transmission models

Shifting 1Shifting
■ Shift Lever Operation NOTICE
Do not shift to (R before the vehicle comes to a
Fully depress the clutch pedal to operate the shift lever and change gears, then complete stop.
slowly release the pedal. Shifting to (R before stopping can damage the
transmission.
Depress the clutch pedal, and pause for a few seconds before shifting into (R , or
shift into one of the forward gears for a moment. This stops the gears so they do not NOTICE
“grind.” Before downshifting, make sure the engine will not
go into the tachometer's red zone. Should this occur,
it can severely damage your engine.

There is a metallic part on the shift lever. If you leave

the vehicle parked outside for a long time on a hot
day, be careful before moving the shift lever. Because
of heat, the shift lever may be extremely hot. If the
outside temperature is low, the shift lever may feel

Driving
cold.

Continued 229
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

5-speed manual When you are not shifting, do not rest your 1Shifting
transmission foot on the clutch pedal. This can cause your Recommended Shift Points
clutch to wear out faster. Driving in the highest gear that allows the engine to
run and accelerate smoothly helps to optimize fuel
economy and effective emissions control. The
following shift points are recommended:

5-speed manual transmission models

Shift Up Normal Acceleration

1st to 2nd 15 mph (24 km/h)
6-speed manual
transmission 2nd to 3rd 27 mph (43 km/h)
3rd to 4th 39 mph (63 km/h)
4th to 5th 53 mph (85 km/h)

6-speed manual transmission models

Shift Up Normal Acceleration

Driving

1st to 2nd 17 mph (27 km/h)

2nd to 3rd 29 mph (46 km/h)
3rd to 4th 37 mph (59 km/h)
4th to 5th 43 mph (69 km/h)
5th to 6th 49 mph (79 km/h)

If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you

are in, the engine speed will enter into the
tachometer's red zone. When this happens, you may
experience a slight jolt.

230
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ Reverse Lockout
6-speed manual transmission models
The manual transmission has a lockout mechanism that stops you from accidentally
shifting into (R from a forward gear while the vehicle is moving above a certain
speed.

If you cannot shift to (R when the vehicle is stopped, do the following:

1. Depress the clutch pedal, move the shift

lever all the way to the left, and shift to (R .
2. If you still cannot shift into (R , apply the
parking brake, and turn the ignition switch
to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 .
3. Depress the clutch pedal and shift into (R .
4. Keep depressing the clutch pedal and start

Driving
the engine.

Have the vehicle checked by a dealer if you

have to go through this procedure repeatedly.

231
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuWhen DrivinguECON Button *

ECON Button *

The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off.

The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the
performance of the engine, transmission, heating and cooling system/climate
control system, and cruise control.
Driving

232 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control *

Cruise Control *
Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the 1Cruise Control *
accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a
constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration. 3 WARNING
When to use
Improper use of the cruise control can lead
to a crash.
■ Vehicle speed for cruise control:
Desired speed in a range above Always keep sufficient distance
roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~
Use the cruise control only when traveling
between you and the vehicle in
front of you.
on open highways in good weather.
Automatic transmission models
■ Shift positions for cruise control:
In (D or (d It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed
when driving uphill or downhill.

When not using cruise control:

How to use Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE
CRUISE MAIN is on in the
instrument panel. button.
Cruise control is ready to use.

Driving
■ Press the CRUISE button on 1.8 ℓ engine models
the steering wheel. While in the ECON mode, it may take relatively more
time to accelerate to maintain the set speed.

Manual transmission models

When the engine speed slows down, try to
downshift.
You can maintain the set speed if you change gear
within five seconds.

* Not available on all models Continued 233

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control *

■ To Set the Vehicle Speed

–/SET Button

On

On

On when cruise control begins Press and release

Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired
speed.
Driving

The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control
begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.

234
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control *

1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
You can set the vehicle speed using the –/SET button
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET buttons on the on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with
steering wheel. the accelerator and brake pedals.

To increase speed

To decrease speed

• Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by

Driving
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you
release it. This speed is then set. 1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed:
■ To Cancel After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+
To cancel cruise control, do any of the
button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40
following: km/h) or more.
CRUISE • Press the CANCEL button.
Button • Press the CRUISE button. You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
CANCEL • Depress the brake pedal. • When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
Button • Depress the clutch pedal for five seconds or • When the CRUISE button is turned off
more.
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.
control is canceled automatically.

235
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System

VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic

Stability Control), System 1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability
Control), System
VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less
than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.
type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.

■ VSA® Operation When the VSA® indicator comes on and stays on

while driving, there may be a problem with the
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the system. While this may not interfere with normal
engine does not respond to the accelerator. driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer
You may also notice some noise from the immediately.
hydraulic system. You will also see the
indicator blink. VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations
and does not control the entire braking system. You
still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate
for the conditions and always leave a sufficient
VSA® System
margin of safety.
Indicator
Driving

The main function of the VSA® system is generally

known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The
system also includes a traction control function.

236
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System

1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability

■ VSA® On and Off
Control), System
1.8 ℓ engine models This button is on the driver side control panel.
Without VSA®, your vehicle will have normal braking
To turn the VSA® system on and off, press and and cornering ability, but it will not have VSA®
hold it until you hear a beep. traction and stability enhancement.
VSA® OFF
Indicator VSA® will stop and the indicator will come on. In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets
stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.
To turn it on again, press the (VSA® OFF)
button until you hear a beep. When the VSA® system is off, the traction control
system is also off. You should only attempt to free
2.4 ℓ engine models VSA® is turned on every time you start the your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to
engine, even if you turned it off the last time free it when the VSA® is on.
you drove the vehicle.
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to
VSA® OFF switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving
Indicator

Driving
your vehicle with the VSA® and traction control
systems switched off.

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator * comes on or

blinks, the VSA® system comes on automatically. In
this case, you cannot turn the system off by pressing
the button.

You may hear a motor sound coming from the

engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.

* Not available on all models 237

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuWhen DrivinguTPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

U.S. models
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) 1TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
Monitors the tire pressure while you are Conditions such as low ambient temperature and
driving. If your vehicle's tire pressure becomes altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can
significantly low, the low tire pressure/TPMS trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come
indicator comes on and a message appears on on.
2 If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
the i-MID.
Comes On or Blinks P. 340

CHECK TIRE PRESSURE is displayed when a Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
tire has significantly low pressure. • Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
• Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come
on as a result of over inflation.
Driving

238
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

U.S. models
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required
Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with

a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale

Driving
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you

should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability.

Continued 239
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction

indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may

not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
Driving

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including

the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or

more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.

240
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Braking
Brake System
1Parking Brake
■ Parking Brake
NOTICE
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking.
Release the parking brake fully before driving. The
To apply: rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive
Pull the lever fully up without pressing the with the parking brake applied.
release button.
If you start driving without fully releasing the parking
brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning, and RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE appears on the i-MID *.

Always apply the parking brake when parking.

To release:
1. Pull the lever slightly, and press and hold
the release button.
2. Lower the lever down all the way, then

Driving
release the button.

* Not available on all models Continued 241

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBrakinguBrake System

1Foot Brake
■ Foot Brake
Check the brakes after driving through deep water,
Your vehicle is equipped with front disc brakes. The brakes on the rear wheels may or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If
be disc or drum, depending on the model. A vacuum power assist helps reduce the necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the
effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases the stopping pedal several times.
force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-
lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard. If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when
2 Brake Assist System P. 244 applying the brakes, the brake pads need to be
replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) P. 243
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a
long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake
effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a
lower gear. With manual transmission use a lower
gear for greater engine braking.
Driving

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while

driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause
them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad
life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.

242
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBrakinguABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

1ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
■ ABS
NOTICE
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by
The ABS may not function correctly if you use an
pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you. incorrect tire type and size.

The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also When the ABS indicator comes on while driving,
balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading. there may be a problem with the system.
While normal braking is not affected, there is a
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always possibility of the ABS not operating. Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as
“stomp and steer.” The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes
to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control
■ ABS operation during hard braking.
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the
pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very In the following cases, your vehicle may need more
stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS:
hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately

Driving
• When driving on rough road surfaces, including
if you are trying to stop on snow or ice. when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops. • When tire chains are installed.

You may hear a motor sound coming from the

engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.

243
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBrakinguBrake Assist System

Brake Assist System

■ Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress
the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.

■ Brake assist system operation

Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.

When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise
may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.
Driving

244
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Parking Your Vehicle

When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly. 1Parking Your Vehicle
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,
Automatic transmission models such as dry grass, oil, or timber.
Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
3. Move the shift lever from (D to (P .
Manual transmission models
1When Stopped
3. Move the shift lever to (R or (1 .
All models NOTICE
Automatic transmission models
4. Turn off the engine.
The following can damage the transmission:
• Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline. simultaneously.
• Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
• Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.

Driving
Raise the wiper arms when snow is expected.

245
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Rearview Camera *
About Your Rearview Camera
Models with navigation system 1About Your Rearview Camera
For models with the navigation system, see the Navigation System Manual for the The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see
rearview camera. the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath
Models without navigation system the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects
appear closer or farther than they actually are.
The i-MID * can display your vehicle’s rear view.
The display automatically changes to a rear view when the shift lever is moved to Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing
(R . up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and
high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do
■ Rearview Camera Display Area not rely on the rearview display which does not give
you all information about conditions at the back of
your vehicle.

Guidelines Approx. 118 in (3 m) If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,
use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free
Approx. 79 in (2 m) of debris.
Bumper Approx. 39 in (1 m)
Driving

Camera
Approx. 20 in (0.5 m)
Approx. 39 in (1 m)

Approx. 79 in (2 m)
Approx. 118 in (3 m)

The rearview camera has a unique lens that makes objects appear closer or further
than they actually are.

246 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

Refueling
Fuel Information
■ Fuel recommendation 1Fuel Information
NOTICE
1.8 ℓ engine models We recommend quality gasoline containing
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and
engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain
Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise good performance, fuel economy, and emissions
that can lead to engine damage. control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline
that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based
2.4 ℓ engine models fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is
available.
Unleaded premium gasoline, pump octane number 91 or higher
Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause occasional metallic knocking noise in the Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely
engine and will result in decreased engine performance. affect performance, and cause the malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.
Use of a gasoline with a pump octane less than 87 can lead to engine damage.
If this happens, contact a dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such
■ Top tier detergent gasoline as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on

Driving
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda oxygenated gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol
endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.
maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try
another service station or switch to another brand of
Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive
gasoline.
manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.

Continued 247
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic
additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission
control system.

For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on

gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit
www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top
tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.

■ Fuel tank capacity: 13.2 US gal (50 liters)

How to Refuel 1How to Refuel

Driving

Push
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station 3 WARNING
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
rear.
You can be burned or seriously injured
2. Turn off the engine.
when handling fuel.
3. Push on the fuel fill door release handle at
the foot of the driver’s seat.
• Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
u The fuel fill door opens.
and flame away.
• Handle fuel only outdoors.
• Wipe up spills immediately.

248
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

4. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a 1How to Refuel
release of air, wait until this stops, then turn The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in
the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap. the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result
of changes in air temperature.

If the fuel nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is

not full, there may be a problem with the pump's fuel
vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If
this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
Cap
5. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder. Do not continue to add fuel after the nozzle has
Cap
6. Insert the filler nozzle fully. automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed
u When the tank is full, the fuel nozzle will the full tank capacity.
click off automatically. This leaves space
in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands
with a change in the temperature.

Driving
7. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap,
tightening it until you hear it click at least
Holder
once.
u Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

249
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy
Fuel economy depends on several conditions, including driving conditions, your 1Improving Fuel Economy
driving habits, the condition of your vehicle, and loading. Depending on these and Direct calculation is the recommended method to
other conditions, you may or may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle. determine actual fuel consumed while driving.

■ Maintenance and Fuel Economy

Gallons of Miles per
Miles driven
fuel Gallon

Liters of Kilometers
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle. 100 fuel driven
L per 100 km

Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the
information display */i-MID *. In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are
• Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal. established following a simulated test. For more
• Maintain the specified tire pressure. information on how this test is performed, please visit
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/
• Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
• Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle's underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.
Driving

250 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

Accessories and Modifications

Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following: 1Accessories and Modifications
• Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions. 3 WARNING
• Do not install accessories on the side pillars or across the side windows. Improper accessories or modifications can
Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the affect your vehicle's handling, stability, and
side curtain airbags. performance, and cause a crash in which
• Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with you can be seriously hurt or killed.
proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 341 Follow all instructions in this owner's
• Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for manual regarding accessories and
assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation. modifications.

Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to

Modifications ensure proper operation on your vehicle.
Do not modify your vehicle or use non-Honda components that can affect its

Driving
handling, stability, and reliability.

Overall vehicle performance can be affected. Always make sure all equipment is
properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province,
territory, and local regulations.

251
 Main Menu Table of Contents

252
 Main Menu

Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.

Before Performing Maintenance Engine Coolant ................................ 275 Tire Service Life................................ 302
Inspection and Maintenance ............ 254 Transmission Fluid............................ 277 Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 303
Safety When Performing Maintenance..... 255 Brake/Clutch Fluid............................ 280 Tire Rotation.................................... 304
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 281 Winter Tires ..................................... 305
Service ........................................... 256 Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 282 Battery............................................... 306
Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 257 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Remote Transmitter Care *
Maintenance Under the Hood Blades .......................................... 295 Replacing the Button Battery ........... 307
Maintenance Items Under the Hood..... 265 Checking and Maintaining Tires Heating and Cooling System */Climate
Opening the Hood ........................... 267 Checking Tires ................................. 297 Control System * Maintenance....... 308
Recommended Engine Oil ................ 268 Tire and Loading Information Label ...... 298 Cleaning
Oil Check ......................................... 269 Tire Labeling .................................... 298 Interior Care .................................... 309
Adding Engine Oil ............................ 271 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).......300 Exterior Care.................................... 311
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ..... 272 Wear Indicators................................ 302

* Not available on all models 253

 Main Menu Table of Contents

Before Performing Maintenance

Inspection and Maintenance
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle 1Inspection and Maintenance
in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient U.S. models
brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in emissions control devices and systems may be
effect.) Refer to the separate maintenance booklet for detailed maintenance and done by any automotive repair establishment or
individuals using parts that are “certified” to
inspection information.
EPA standards.

■ Types of Inspection and Maintenance According to state and federal regulations, failure to
perform maintenance on the maintenance main
■ Daily inspections items marked with # will not void your emissions
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when warranties. However, all maintenance services should
refueling. be performed in accordance with the intervals
indicated by the information display */i-MID *.
■ Periodic inspections 2 Maintenance Service Items P. 259, 263
• Check the automatic transmission fluid level monthly.
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks
2 Automatic Transmission Fluid P. 277
that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a
• Check the brake fluid level monthly. subscription to the Service Express website at
2 Brake/Clutch Fluid P. 280 www.techinfo.honda.com.
• Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects. 2 Authorized Manuals P. 357
Maintenance

2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 297

• Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly. If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 282 sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.
After performing maintenance, update the records in
• Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months. the separate maintenance booklet.
2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 295

254 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance

Safety When Performing Maintenance

Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. 1Safety When Performing Maintenance
However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform 3 WARNING
a given task. Improperly maintaining this vehicle or
failing to correct a problem before driving
■ Maintenance Safety can cause a crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
• To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames
away from the battery and all fuel related parts. Always follow the inspection and
• Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood. maintenance recommendations according
u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them causing a fire. to the schedules in this owner's manual.
• To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not
gasoline.
• Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or 3 WARNING
compressed air. Failure to properly follow maintenance
• Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you. instructions and precautions can cause you
u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation. to be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the procedures and

■ Vehicle Safety

Maintenance
precautions in this owner's manual.
• The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the engine is off.
• Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before
touching vehicle parts.
• Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away
from moving parts.

255
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the
same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.
Maintenance

256
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Maintenance MinderTM

If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages
appear on the information display * or the i-MID * every time you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w . The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when
to bring your vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.

Models with information display

To Use Maintenance MinderTM
■ Displaying the Engine Oil Life 1Displaying the Engine Oil Life
Based on the engine operating conditions, the
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w . remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
2. Press the (Select/Reset) knob repeatedly as a percentage.
until the engine oil life appears on the
Displayed Engine Oil Calculated Engine Oil
information display. Life (%) Life (%)
100 100 to 91
The Maintenance Minder indicator ( ) stays 90 90 to 81
on in the instrument panel after the engine oil 80 80 to 71
life becomes 0%. Have the indicated 70 70 to 61
maintenance done by a dealer immediately.

Maintenance
60 60 to 51
50 50 to 41
40 40 to 31
30 30 to 21
20 20 to 16
15 15 to 11
10 10 to 6
5 5 to 1
0 0

* Not available on all models Continued 257

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Maintenance Minder Messages on the Information Display

To switch the display, press the (Select/Reset) knob.
Oil Life Display Explanation Information Maintenance Minder Indicator

The engine oil life indicator starts The engine oil is approaching the
to appear along with other due end of its service life.
soon maintenance item codes
when the remaining oil life Starts to come on when the
becomes 15 percent. remaining engine oil life becomes
15 percent.
The SERVICE message also starts The engine oil has almost reached
It goes off when the display is
to appear along with the engine oil the end of its service life, and the
switched.
life indicator and the maintenance maintenance items should be
item codes. inspected and serviced as soon as
possible.
The remaining engine oil life has The engine oil life has passed.
passed its service life, and a The maintenance items must be
negative distance appears after inspected and serviced
Maintenance

driving over 10 miles (U.S. models) immediately. Stays on as a reminder even when
or 10 km (Canadian models). The the display is switched.
negative distance on the display
blinks.

258
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

1Maintenance Service Items

■ Maintenance Service Items
• Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Maintenance • Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000
Minder Indicator Maintenance Minder Message
km).
Main Item • Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.

Sub Items

CODE Maintenance Main Items CODE Maintenance Sub Items

A ● Replace engine oil*1 1 ● Rotate tires
B ● Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter 2 ● Replace air cleaner element*2
● Inspect front and rear brakes/service as necessary ● Replace dust and pollen filter *,*3
● Check parking brake adjustment ● Inspect drive belt

Maintenance
● Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots 3 ● Replace transmission fluid
● Inspect suspension components 4 ● Replace spark plugs
● Inspect driveshaft boots ● Inspect valve clearance
● Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA) 5 ● Replace engine coolant
● Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
● Inspect exhaust system# *3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
● Inspect fuel lines and connections# from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

*1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the
engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.

* Not available on all models Continued 259

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

1Resetting the Display

■ Resetting the Display
NOTICE
Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.
Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w . service results in the system showing incorrect
2. Display the engine oil life by repeatedly maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious
pressing the (Select/Reset) knob. mechanical problems.
3. Press and hold the knob for ten seconds
or more. The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after
u The engine oil life indicator and the completing the required maintenance service. If
someone other than a dealer performs maintenance
maintenance item codes blink.
service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.
4. Press the knob for five seconds or more.
u The displayed maintenance items
disappear, and the engine oil life display
returns to 100%.
Maintenance

260
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Models with i-MID

To Use Maintenance MinderTM
■ Displaying the Engine Oil Life and Maintenance Items 1Displaying the Engine Oil Life and Maintenance Items
Based on the engine operating conditions, the
Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
engine oil, appear on the i-MID. as a percentage.
You can view them on the Maintenance info screen at any time.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w . Displayed Engine Oil Calculated Engine Oil
2. Press the MENU button to go to the Vehicle Menu screen. Life (%) Life (%)
3. Select Vehicle Information with the (+ button, then press the SOURCE button. 100 100 to 91
90 90 to 81
4. Press the SOURCE button again to go to the Maintenance info screen. The
engine oil life appears on the i-MID. 80 80 to 71
70 70 to 61
Engine Oil Life 60 60 to 51
50 50 to 41
2345 40 40 to 31
50 30 30 to 21
Engine oil Main 20 20 to 16
Item 15 15 to 11
Air filters
10 10 to 6
5 5 to 1

Maintenance
Sub Item 0 0

There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you

can view on the i-MID.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 263
(+ Button
SOURCE
SOURCE
Button
MENU MENU
Button

Continued 261
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Maintenance Minder Messages on the i-MID

Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information

SERVICE DUE SOON 15 % The remaining engine oil life is 15 to The engine oil is approaching the end
6 percent. Once you switch the of its service life, and the maintenance
2345
15 display by pressing the (display/ items should be inspected and serviced
Engine oil information) button, this message soon.
2345
Air filters will go off.

SERVICE DUE NOW 5% The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1 The engine oil has almost reached the
percent. Press the button to end of its service life, and the
2345
5 switch to another display. maintenance items should be inspected
Engine oil and serviced as soon as possible.
2345
Air filters

SERVICE PAST DUE Negative Distance The remaining engine oil life has The engine oil life has passed.
Maintenance

passed its service life, and a negative The maintenance items must be
distance appears after driving over inspected and serviced immediately.
-30 10 miles (U.S. models) or 10 km
2345
2345 (Canadian models). Press the
button to switch to another display.

The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.

262
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

1Maintenance Service Items

■ Maintenance Service Items
• Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
System Message • Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000
Indicator Maintenance Minder
Message km).
• Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.

2345

Main Sub Items

Item

CODE Maintenance Main Items CODE Maintenance Sub Items

A ● Replace engine oil*1 1 ● Rotate tires
B ● Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter 2 ● Replace air cleaner element*2
● Inspect front and rear brakes/service as necessary ● Replace dust and pollen filter*3
● Check parking brake adjustment ● Inspect drive belt

Maintenance
● Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots 3 ● Replace transmission fluid
● Inspect suspension components 4 ● Replace spark plugs
● Inspect driveshaft boots ● Inspect valve clearance
● Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA) 5 ● Replace engine coolant
● Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
● Inspect exhaust system# *3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
● Inspect fuel lines and connections# from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
● Check the expiration date for TRK bottle*2
*1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the
engine oil every year.
*2: Models with tire repair kit
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.
Continued 263
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

1Resetting the Display

■ Resetting the Display
NOTICE
Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.
Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance
service results in the system showing incorrect
maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious
2345
mechanical problems.
5 Engine
Oil Life
Engine oil The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after
Air filters completing the required maintenance service. If
someone other than a dealer performs maintenance
service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.
Maintenance Item Codes

SOURCE
Button
SOURCE

(- Button
Maintenance

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w .

2. Go to the Maintenance info screen.
2 Displaying the Engine Oil Life and Maintenance Items P. 261
3. Press the SOURCE button.
u The oil life reset mode is displayed on the i-MID.
4. Select Yes with the (- button, then press the SOURCE button.
u The displayed maintenance items disappear, and the engine oil life display
returns to 100%.
u Any maintenance items that are necessary for your vehicle at the next
maintenance service will appear.
To cancel the oil life reset mode, select No, then press the SOURCE button.

264
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Maintenance Under the Hood

Maintenance Items Under the Hood
1.8 ℓ engine models

Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)

Engine Oil Dipstick Manual transmission

(Orange Handle) models
Clutch Fluid
(Light Gray Cap)
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Automatic transmission
models
Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap) Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Dipstick
(Yellow Loop)

Battery

Maintenance
Radiator Cap Engine Coolant Reservoir

Continued 265
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuMaintenance Under the HooduMaintenance Items Under the Hood

2.4 ℓ engine models

Engine Oil Fill Cap Brake Fluid

(Black Cap)

Clutch Fluid
Engine Oil Dipstick
(Light Gray Cap)
(Orange Handle)

Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap) Battery
Maintenance

Radiator Cap Engine Coolant Reservoir

266
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood

Opening the Hood

Hood Release Handle 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set 1Opening the Hood
the parking brake. NOTICE
2. Pull the hood release handle under the Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are
lower left corner of the dashboard. raised.
u The hood will pop up slightly. The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage
either the hood or the wipers.
Pull
When closing the hood, check that the hood is
securely latched.

3. Push up the hood latch lever in the center If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can
of the hood to release the lock mechanism, open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch
and open the hood. mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

Lever

Maintenance
Support Rod Grip 4. Remove the support rod from the clamp
using the grip. Mount the support rod in
the hood.

When closing, remove the support rod, and

stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the
hood. Remove your hand at a height of
Clamp approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the
hood close.

267
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil

Recommended Engine Oil

• Genuine Honda Motor Oil 1Recommended Engine Oil
• Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the Engine Oil Additives
container. Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,
they may adversely affect the engine performance
Oil is a major contributor to your engine's and durability.
performance and longevity. If you drive the
vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil,
the engine may fail or be damaged.

This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving

and that it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.

Use a Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another

commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for
the ambient temperature as shown.
Maintenance

Ambient Temperature

■ Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal
and is the specified viscosity grade.

268
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel. 1Oil Check
Park the vehicle on level ground. If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly
Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the add oil being careful not to overfill.
oil.
1.8 ℓ engine models 1. Remove the dipstick (orange handle).
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.

2.4 ℓ engine models

Maintenance
Continued 269
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

1.8 ℓ engine models 4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the
level. It should be between the upper and
lower marks. Add oil if necessary.

Upper Mark
Lower Mark
2.4 ℓ engine models

Upper Mark
Lower Mark
Maintenance

270
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

1.8 ℓ engine models 1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap. 1Adding Engine Oil
2. Add oil slowly. If any oil spills, wipe it up immediately. Spilled oil may
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten damage the engine compartment components.
it securely.
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the NOTICE
engine oil dipstick. Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.
Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and
Engine Oil engine damage.
Fill Cap

2.4 ℓ engine models

Engine Oil
Fill Cap

Maintenance
271
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the 1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
engine's lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly. NOTICE
You may damage the environment if you do not
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are
information display */i-MID *. changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take
1.8 ℓ engine
models operating temperature, and then turn the it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away
into a garbage can or onto the ground.
engine off.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
fill cap.

1.8 ℓ engine models

3. Remove the bolts on the undercarriage
Bolt Under Cover
and remove the under cover.
Maintenance

272 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

1.8 ℓ engine models All models

4. Remove the drain bolt and washer from
Drain Bolt the bottom of the engine, and drain the
oil into a suitable container.

Washer

2.4 ℓ engine models

Drain
Bolt

Washer

Maintenance
Continued 273
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

1.8 ℓ engine models 5. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the 1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
remaining oil. You will need a special wrench to replace the oil
6. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
the engine contact surface.
u If it is stuck, you must detach it. When installing the new oil filter, follow the
7. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the instructions supplied with the oil filter.
contact surface of the engine block, and
install a new oil filter. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The
Oil Filter u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to low oil pressure indicator should go off within five
the oil gasket. seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check
2.4 ℓ engine models 8. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then your work.
reinstall the drain bolt.
u Tightening torque:
1.8 ℓ engine models
29 lbf∙ft (39 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
2.4 ℓ engine models
30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
Oil Filter
9. Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine.
u Engine oil change capacity (including
filter):
Maintenance

1.8 ℓ engine models

3.9 US qt (3.7 L)
2.4 ℓ engine models
4.4 US qt (4.2 L)
10. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and
start the engine.
11. Run the engine for a few minutes, and
then check that there is no leak from the
drain bolt or oil filter.
12. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes,
and then check the oil level on the dipstick.
u If necessary, add more engine oil.
274
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

Engine Coolant
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 1Engine Coolant
NOTICE
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any If temperatures consistently below −22°F (−30°C) are
straight antifreeze or water. expected, the coolant mixture should be changed to
a higher concentration. Consult a dealer for more
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the information.
reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may
radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.
use another major brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
■ Reserve Tank coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result
MAX 1. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve in corrosion, causing the cooling system to
tank. malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed
and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.

Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your

vehicle's coolant system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the engine components.
Reserve

Maintenance
Tank MIN

2. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark,

add the specified coolant until it reaches
the MAX mark.
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Continued 275
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

1Radiator
■ Radiator
1.8 ℓ engine models 1. Make sure the engine and radiator are 3 WARNING
cool. Removing the radiator cap while the
Radiator Cap 2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise and engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
relieve any pressure in the coolant system. out, seriously scalding you.
Do not push the cap down when turning.
3. Push down and turn the radiator cap Always let the engine and radiator cool
counterclockwise to remove it. down before removing the radiator cap.
4. The coolant level should be up to the base
of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
NOTICE
2.4 ℓ engine models 5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
fully. any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
Radiator Cap
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it damage components in the engine compartment.
reaches the MAX mark. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Maintenance

276
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid

Transmission Fluid
1Automatic Transmission Fluid
■ Automatic Transmission Fluid
NOTICE
Specified fluid: Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid) Do not mix Honda ATF DW-1 with other
transmission fluids.
Check the fluid level when the engine is at normal operating temperature. Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF
1. Park on level ground, and start the engine. DW-1 may adversely affect the operation and
2. Wait until the radiator fan starts and then durability of your vehicle's transmission, and damage
turn off the engine. the transmission.
u Perform step 3 after waiting for about 60 Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to Honda ATF DW-1 is not covered
seconds (less than 90 seconds).
by Honda's new vehicle warranty.
3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) from the
transmission and wipe it with a clean cloth. NOTICE
HOT Upper Mark 4. Insert the dipstick all the way back into the Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
Range Lower Mark transmission securely, as shown in the any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
image. damage components in the engine compartment.
5. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid
level.
u It should be between the upper and
lower marks in the HOT range.

Maintenance
6. If the level is below the lower mark, add
fluid into the dipstick hole to bring it to the
level between the upper and lower marks,
and have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.

Continued 277
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid

1Manual Transmission Fluid

■ Manual Transmission Fluid
If Honda MTF is not available, you may use the API
Specified fluid: Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) certificated SAE 0 W-20 or 5 W-20 viscosity motor oil
as a temporary measure.
Check the fluid level when the engine is at normal operating temperature. Replace with MTF as soon as possible. Motor oil does
1.8 ℓ engine 1. Park the vehicle on level ground. not contain the proper additives for the transmission
models and continued use can cause decreased shifting
1.8 ℓ engine models
performance and lead to transmission damage.
2. Remove the bolts with a wrench, then
carefully remove the under cover.

Bolt Under Cover

1.8 ℓ engine 3. Remove the holding clip and the bolt, then
Left Side
models bend down the front edge of the left side
Under Cover
under cover as shown in the image.

Bolt
Maintenance

Clip

278
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid

1.8 ℓ engine models All models

4. Remove the transmission filler bolt and
washer. Carefully feel inside the bolt hole
with your fingers.
u Check if the fluid level is up to the edge
of the bolt hole.
5. If the fluid level is not up to the edge of the
bolt hole, add Honda Manual Transmission
Fluid (MTF) until it runs out of the hole.
2.4 ℓ engine models 6. Put a new washer on the filler bolt, then
reinstall the filler bolt.
u Tightening torque:
33 lbf∙ft (44 N∙m, 4.5 kgf∙m)
1.8 ℓ engine models
7. Reinstall the left side under cover with the
holding clip and the bolt.
8. Reinstall the under cover with the bolts.

Maintenance
279
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake/Clutch Fluid

Brake/Clutch Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 1Brake/Clutch Fluid
NOTICE
Use the same fluid for both the brakes and clutch. Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your
vehicle's braking system and can cause extensive
■ Checking the Brake Fluid damage.

The fluid level should be between the MIN If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should
and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir. use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed
container as a temporary replacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion

MAX and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the
MIN brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.

Brake Reservoir If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect for leaks or worn brake pads as
soon as possible.

Manual transmission models

Maintenance

1Checking the Clutch Fluid

■ Checking the Clutch Fluid
If the clutch fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
The fluid level should be between the MIN have a dealer inspect for leaks or an excessively worn
Clutch Reservoir and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir. clutch plate as soon as possible.

MAX
MIN

280
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid

Refilling Window Washer Fluid

Check the amount of window washer fluid using the washer fluid level gauge on the 1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
cap. NOTICE
If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir. Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water
solution in the windshield washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle's paint. A
vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield
washer pump.

Level Gauge

Maintenance
281
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Replacing Light Bulbs

Headlight Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs. 1Headlight Bulbs
High beam headlight: 60 W (HB3 for halogen bulb type) NOTICE
Low beam headlight: 51 W (HB4 for halogen bulb type) Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.
Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause
the bulb to overheat and shatter.
■ High Beam Headlight
1. Push the tab to remove the coupler. The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
Coupler
2. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove. need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk or tow a trailer, have the
3. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified
Tab assembly and turn it to the right. technician.
4. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
Bulb bulb. When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base,
and protect the glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

The exterior lights' inside lenses (headlights, brake

lamps, etc.) may fog temporarily after a car wash or
while driving in the rain. This does not impact the
Maintenance

exterior light function.

However, if you see a large amount of water or ice
accumulated inside the lenses, have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.

282
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs

1Low Beam Headlights

■ Low Beam Headlights
Holding clip (A-type)
Driver side
Clip (A) Pull the clip straight up to remove it.
1.8 ℓ engine models
Cover 1. Remove the holding clips (A). Push up the
tab, and remove the cover of the air intake
Tab
duct and its upper part.

Air
Intake
Duct
2.4 ℓ engine models
1. Unlock the holding clips (B), then remove
the cover of the air intake duct. Keep the head of the clip raised when you insert it,
push until it clicks.
Clip (B)

Maintenance
Cover
Fold in the upper part of the air intake duct to
Air Intake Duct get enough working space.

Continued 283
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs

Passenger side 1Low Beam Headlights

Clip (C)
All models Holding clip (B-type)
2. Remove the holding clip (C) using a flat-tip Press down the central pin until it clicks to unlock it.
screwdriver, then remove the upper part of
the windshield washer reservoir.

Central pin

Push the central pin back to lock the clip. Then, insert
the clip into the hole and press on the central pin
until it is flat.

Push until
the pin is
Maintenance

flat.

284
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs

All models 1Low Beam Headlights

Coupler
3. Push the tab to remove the coupler. Holding clip (C-type)
4. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove. Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the
5. Insert a new bulb into the headlight central pin to remove the clip.
assembly and turn it to the right.
Bulb Central pin
6. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
Tab

Insert the clip with the central pin raised, and push
until it is flat.

Maintenance
Push until the
pin is flat.

285
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs *

Fog Light Bulbs *

When replacing, use the following bulbs. 1Fog Light Bulbs *
1.8 ℓ models NOTICE
Fog Light: 55 W (H11 for halogen bulb type) Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration,
2.4 ℓ models or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
Fog Light: 35 W (H8 for halogen bulb type)

1.8 ℓ models 1. Insert a flat-tip screwdriver into the tab on When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its
Tab Cover
plastic case, and protect the glass from contact with
the cover, then pull straight out as indicated
your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean
to remove the cover. it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

2.4 ℓ models Cover

Tab
Maintenance

286 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs *

1.8 ℓ models 2. Remove the screws using a Phillips-head

Screws screwdriver and carefully pull the fog light
assembly out of the bumper.

2.4 ℓ models
Screws

Maintenance
Continued 287
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs *

1.8 ℓ models 3. Push the tab to remove the coupler.

4. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
5. Insert a new bulb into the fog light
assembly and turn it to the right.
6. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
Bulb

Coupler
Tab
2.4 ℓ models

Bulb

Coupler
Tab
Maintenance

288
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker Light Bulbs

Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker Light Bulbs

When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker Light: 28/8 W

Inner 1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the

Fender opposite side from the light being replaced.
Passenger side: Turn the steering wheel
to the left.
Driver side: Turn the steering wheel to the
Clip
right.
2. Remove the holding clips, and pull the inner
fender back.
2 Low Beam Headlights P. 285
2.4 ℓ engine models
3. Detach the air intake duct tube and swing it
out of the inner fender.

Air

Maintenance
Intake
Duct
Tube

Continued 289
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker Light Bulbs

All models
4. Turn the socket to the left and remove it,
then remove the old bulb.
5. Insert a new bulb.

Bulb Socket
Maintenance

290
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake/Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs

Brake/Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side

Marker Light Bulbs 1Brake/Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Light
When replacing, use the following bulbs. Bulbs
Rear side marker light bulbs are LED type. Have an
Brake/Taillight: 21/5 W authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber) bulbs.
Rear Side Marker Light: LED
When removing the clip, insert a flat-tip screwdriver,
1. Remove the holding clips using a flat-tip then lift and remove the clip.
Lining
screwdriver, then pull the lining back.

Clip

Clip

Bulb Socket 2. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Insert the clip with the pin raised, and push until it is

Maintenance
flat.

Socket
Bulb Push until the
pin is flat.

291
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuReplacing Light BulbsuTaillight and Back-Up Light Bulbs

Taillight and Back-Up Light Bulbs

When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Back-Up Light: 16 W
Taillight: 3 CP

Lining 1. Remove the screw from the center of the

Fastener fastener using a Phillips-head screwdriver.
2. Remove the holding clips using a flat-tip
screwdriver, then pull the lining back.
2 Brake/Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light
and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
P. 291

Clip

3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.

Bulb Bulb
4. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Maintenance

Socket Socket

292
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulbs

Rear License Plate Light Bulbs

When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Rear License Plate Light: 5 W

Lining Models with trunk lid lining

Fastener 1. Remove the screw from the center of the
fastener using a Phillips-head screwdriver.
2. Remove the holding clips using a flat-tip
screwdriver, then pull the lining back.

Clip
All models
3. Remove the license plate light assembly by
squeezing the tabs on both sides of the
Bulb socket.
4. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Socket

Maintenance
293
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuReplacing Light BulbsuHigh-Mount Brake Light Bulb

High-Mount Brake Light Bulb

1.8 ℓ engine models
When replacing, use the following bulb.
High-Mount Brake Light: 21 W

1. Open the trunk.

2. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

Bulb

Socket

2.4 ℓ engine models

High-mount brake light bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer
inspect and replace the light bulbs.
Maintenance

294
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades

Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the metal wiper
arm may scratch the window glass.

Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber 1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the NOTICE
passenger side. Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the
windshield.

2. Place a cloth on the edge of the lock tab.

Lock Tab
Push the lock tab up with a flat-tip screw
driver.
3. Slide the blade from the wiper arm.

Maintenance
Continued 295
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber

4. Slide the wiper blade out from its holder by

pulling the tabbed end out.

Blade

5. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade

Top Retainer
that has been removed, and mount to a
Blade new rubber blade.
u Correctly align the rubber protrusion and
the retainer grooves.
Maintenance

6. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder

Indent from the bottom end.
u The tab on the holder should fit in the
indent of the wiper blade.
7. Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm,
Tab then push down the lock tab.
8. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,
then the driver side.

296
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Checking and Maintaining Tires

Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in 1Checking Tires
good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
3 WARNING
■ Inflation guidelines Using tires that are excessively worn or
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort. improperly inflated can cause a crash in
Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specification’s page for the specified pressure. which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and Follow all instructions in this owner’s
are more likely to fail from overheating. manual regarding tire inflation and
maintenance.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,
and wear unevenly. Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This
means the vehicle has been parked for at least three
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If
others, check the pressure with a tire gauge. necessary, add or release air until the specified
pressure is reached.
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in
all tires, including the spare *. Even tires in good condition can lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as
4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.

Maintenance
checked when cold.

■ Inspection guidelines Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems. vibration while driving. New tires and any that have
Look for: been removed and reinstalled should be properly
• Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts, balanced.
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
• Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
• Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
• Excessive tread wear.
2 Wear Indicators P. 302
• Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
* Not available on all models 297
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label

Tire and Loading Information Label

The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading 1Tire and Loading Information Label
information. The tire and loading information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb contains:
Label a The number of people your vehicle can carry.
Example b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight.
c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare, if
equipped.
d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare.

Tire Labeling 1Tire Sizes

The tires that came on your vehicle have a Following is an example of tire size with an
Example Tire Size explanation of what each component means.
Tire number of markings. Those you should be
P205/55 R16 89H
Identification aware of are described below.
P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle).
Number (TIN)
205: Tire width in millimeters.
Maintenance

Maximum 55: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a

Tire Load percentage of its width).
R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).
Maximum
16: Rim diameter in inches.
Tire Pressure
Tire Size 89: Load index (a numerical code associated with the
maximum load the tire can carry).
H: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the
■ Tire Sizes maximum speed rating).
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.

298
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling

1Tire Identification Number (TIN)

■ Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT B97R FW6X 2209
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all
the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire. requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
■ Glossary of Tire Terminology B97R: Manufacturer's identification mark.
FW6X: Tire type code.
Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at 22 09: Date of manufacture.
least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given Year
Week
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can
hold.
Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.

Maintenance
299
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety
Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction,
and temperature performance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these
gradings.

■ Uniform Tire Quality Grading 1Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall For example:
between tread shoulder and maximum section width. Treadwear 200
Traction AA
■ Treadwear Temperature A
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear All passenger car tires must conform
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a to Federal Safety Requirements in
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 addition to these grades.
would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
Maintenance

and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in

driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.

300
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

1Traction
■ Traction
Warning: The traction grade
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
assigned to this tire is based on
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
as measured under controlled conditions on specified
and does not include acceleration,
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
C may have poor traction performance.
traction characteristics.
1Temperature
■ Temperature
Warning: The temperature grade for
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
this tire is established for a tire that is
representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its
properly inflated and not
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
overloaded. Excessive speed,
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
underinflation, or excessive loading,
temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
either separately or in combination,
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
can cause heat buildup and possible
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
tire failure.
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Maintenance
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.

301
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators

Wear Indicators
The groove where the wear indicator is 1Checking Tires
Example of a Wear located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than Models with P215/45R17 tires
Indicator mark elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so Models with 215/45ZR17 tires
that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire. High speed driving
Worn out tires have poor traction on wet We recommend that you do not drive faster than the
posted speed limits and conditions allow. If you drive
roads.
at sustained high speeds (over 112 mph or 180
km/h), adjust the cold tire pressures as shown below
to avoid excessive heat build up and sudden tire
failure.
Tire Size P215/45R17 87V
Tire Service Life 215/45ZR17 91W*1
Pressure 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road *1: Optional for U.S. Si models (summer tires)
conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).

In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is

recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10
Maintenance

years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

302
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement

Tire and Wheel Replacement

Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and 1Tire and Wheel Replacement
maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a
different size or construction can cause the ABS and VSA® (vehicle stability assist) 3 WARNING
system to work incorrectly. Installing improper tires on your vehicle can
affect handling and stability. This can cause
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
front or rear tires in pairs. killed.

Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels. Always use the size and type of tires
recommended in this owner’s manual.
U.S. models
If you replace a wheel, only use TPMS specified wheels approved for your vehicle.

Maintenance
303
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation

Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the information display */ 1Tire Rotation
i-MID * helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life. Tires with directional tread patterns should only be
rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).
■ Tires without rotation marks Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation
Rotate the tires as shown here. indication mark facing forward, as shown below.

Front FRONT

Direction Mark

■ Tires with rotation marks

Rotate the tires as shown here.
Maintenance

Front

304 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires

Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires, 1Winter Tires
or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when
driving. 3 WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent installing chains, can damage the brake
skidding. lines and cause a crash in which you can be
seriously injured or killed.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.
Follow all instructions in this owner's
When mounting, refer to the following points. manual regarding the selection and use of
tire chains.
For winter tires:
• Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
NOTICE
• Mount the tires to all four wheels. Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly
For tire chains: installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines,
• Install them on the front tires only. suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are
• Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the hitting any part of the vehicle.
chains listed below:
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain

Maintenance
Models with P195/65R15 tires
manufacturer's instructions regarding vehicle
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1030 operational limits.
Models with P205/55R16 tires
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
Models with P215/45R17 tires
aware that these tires are not designed for winter
Models with 215/45ZR17 tires driving conditions. For more information, contact a
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1032 dealer.

• Follow the chain manufacturer's instruction when installing. Mount them as

tightly as you can.
• Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
• Drive slowly.

305
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Battery
Checking the Battery
Test Indicator window Check the battery condition monthly. Look at 1Battery
the test indicator window and check the
terminals for corrosion. 3 WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
gas during normal operation.

A spark or flame can cause the battery to

explode with enough force to kill or
seriously hurt you.

If your vehicle's battery is disconnected or goes dead: When conducting any battery
• The audio system is disabled. maintenance, wear protective clothing and
2 Reactivating the audio system P. 152 a face shield, or have a skilled technician do
2 Entering the audio security code P. 152 it.
• The clock * resets.
2 Setting the Clock P. 98 WARNING: Battery post, terminals,
• The navigation system * is disabled. and related accessories contain lead
2 Refer to the navigation system manual and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
Maintenance

Charging the Battery The test indicator's color information is on the

Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle's electrical system. battery.
Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals
by applying a baking powder and water solution.
Clean the terminal with a damp towel. Cloth/towel
dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.

306 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

Remote Transmitter Care *

Replacing the Button Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery. 1Replacing the Button Battery
Battery type: CR1616 NOTICE
An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillips- environment. Always confirm local regulations for
Keypad head screwdriver. Press a button to pry battery disposal.
open the transmitter.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or
at a dealer.

Screw

Tab 2. Open the keypad.

u Separate the inner cover from the
keypad by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
Battery 3. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.

Maintenance
* Not available on all models 307
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Heating and Cooling System*/Climate Control System * Maintenance

Dust and Pollen Filter *
The heating and cooling system */climate control system * is equipped with a dust 1Dust and Pollen Filter *
and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The If the airflow from the heating and cooling system */
Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter. climate control system * deteriorates noticeably, and
the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.
vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.
Maintenance

308 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

Cleaning
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt. 1Interior Care
Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue. Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle.
Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if
■ Cleaning Seat Belts liquids are splashed on them.

Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts. Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices
Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth. such as audio devices and switches.
Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or a fire
inside the vehicle.
Opening If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on
electrical devices, consult a dealer.

Depending on their composition, chemicals and

liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,
and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.
Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as
benzene or gasoline.

After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them

off using a dry cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts

Maintenance
or textiles for long periods of time without washing.

Continued 309
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuCleaninguInterior Care

1Floor Mats *
■ Floor Mats *
If you use any floor mats that were not originally
The driver’s floor mat hooks over the floor provided with your vehicle, make sure they are
anchors, which keep the mat from sliding designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and
Unlock forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn are securely anchored by the floor anchors.
the anchor knobs to the unlock position. Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are
When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere
with the front seat functions.
Lock the knobs to the lock position.

Do not put additional floor mats on top of

the anchored mat.

■ Maintaining Genuine Leather *

Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats
and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and
10% neutral soap solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or
dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
Maintenance

310 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuCleaninguExterior Care

Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.
Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a
painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.

■ Washing the Vehicle 1Washing the Vehicle

Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following Do not spray water into the air intake vents or engine
compartment. It can cause a malfunction.
conditions:
• If driving on roads with road salt.
• If driving in coastal areas.
• If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.

■ Using an Automated Car Wash

Fold in the door mirrors. Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the
automated car wash.
Air Intake Vents
■ Using High Pressure Cleaners

Maintenance
• Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
• Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior. Do not spray water into the engine compartment.

Continued 311
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuCleaninguExterior Care

1Applying Wax
■ Applying Wax
NOTICE
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage
elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe up
elements, so reapply as necessary. spills immediately.

■ Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts 1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when
you want to repair the painted surface of the parts
may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and
made of resin.
clean water.

■ Cleaning the Window 1Cleaning the Window

Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.
Wipe using a glass cleaner. Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a
soft cloth so as not to damage them.
■ Maintaining Aluminum Wheels *
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road
contaminants. Use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away promptly.
Maintenance

Be careful not to use harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or
a stiff brush. They can damage the clear coat of the aluminum alloy wheels that
helps keep the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing.

312 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu

Handling the Unexpected

This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.

Tools Indicator, Coming On/Blinking Fuses

Types of Tools .................................. 314 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes Fuse Locations ................................. 341
If a Tire Goes Flat On ............................................. 337 Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 343
Changing a Flat Tire ......................... 315 If the Charging System Indicator Comes Emergency Towing........................... 344
Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire....... 322 On ................................................. 337
Engine Does Not Start If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes
Checking the Engine ........................ 330 On or Blinks ................................... 338
Jump Starting.................................... 331 If the Brake System Indicator Comes On.......339
Shift Lever Does Not Move .............. 334 If the EPS System Indicator Comes On.... 339
Overheating If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
How to Handle Overheating............. 335 Comes On or Blinks........................ 340

313
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Tools
Models with compact spare tire
Types of Tools 1Types of Tools
The tools were stored in the trunk.

Wheel Nut Wrench/ Jack

Jack Handle

Jack Handle Bar

Handling the Unexpected

314
 Main Menu Table of Contents

If a Tire Goes Flat

Models with compact spare tire
Changing a Flat Tire
1Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact
to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact spare. It should be set to the specified pressure.
spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
replaced.
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the
vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface and apply the parking
a full-size tire as soon as possible.
brake.
The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are
Automatic transmission models specifically for this model.
2. Put the shift lever in (P . Do not use them with another vehicle.

Handling the Unexpected

Do not use another type of compact spare tire or
Manual transmission models wheel with your vehicle.
2. Put the shift lever in (R .
Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire.
All models If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of
the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact
3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 .
spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it
with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear.
Mount the tire chains on the front tire.

U.S. models
Do not use a puncture-repairing agent on a flat tire,
as it can damage the tire pressure sensor.

Continued 315
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire 1Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire

1. Open the trunk floor lid. NOTICE

2.4 ℓ engine models
Do not mount the compact spare on the front. If
mounted on the front, the compact spare, smaller in
size than the normal tire, may damage the
differential.

If either front tire goes flat, remove the rear tire on

the same side, and mount the compact spare on the
rear and the rear tire on the front.
Handling the Unexpected

2. Take the tool case out of the trunk. Take

Tool Case
the jack and wheel nut wrench out of the
tool case.
3. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the
spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.

Spare Tire
4. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear
of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.

Wheel
Blocks
The tire to be replaced.

316
Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

5. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up)

under the vehicle body, near the tire that
needs to be replaced.

Models with 15 x 6J aluminum wheels

6. Remove the center cap from the wheel with

Handling the Unexpected

the jack handle bar.

All models
7. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn
using the wheel nut wrench.

Continued 317
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

1How to Set Up the Jack

■ How to Set Up the Jack
1. Place the jack under the jacking point 3 WARNING
closest to the tire to be changed. The vehicle can easily roll off the jack,
seriously injuring anyone underneath.

Follow the directions for changing a tire

exactly, and never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the jack.

Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the

Handling the Unexpected

2. Turn the end bracket (as shown in the vehicle.

image) clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Use the jack provided in your vehicle.
u Make sure that the jacking point tab is Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or
resting in the jack notch. their shape may not match.

The following instructions must be followed to use

the jack safely.
• Do not use while the engine is running.
• Use only where the ground is firm and level.
3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar • Use only at the jacking points.
and the jack handle, until the tire is off the • Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
ground. • Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.

Jack
Handle Wheel Nut
Bar Wrench as Jack Handle

318
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

1Replacing the Flat Tire

■ Replacing the Flat Tire
Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra
Models with aluminum wheels
torque using your foot or a pipe.
1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.

Handling the Unexpected

Models with wheel cover Models with wheel cover
Wheel
Cover
1. Remove the wheel nuts, wheel cover, and Do not attempt to forcibly pry the wheel cover off
flat tire. with a screwdriver or other tool.
The wheel cover cannot be removed without first
removing the wheel nuts.

All models
2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel
with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire.
4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, and stop
rotating.

Continued 319
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.

Tighten the wheel nuts in the order
indicated in the image. Go around,
tightening the nuts, two to three times in
this order.
Wheel nut torque:
80 lbf∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m)

1Storing the Flat Tire

■ Storing the Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected

Wing For full-

Models with aluminum wheels 3 WARNING
Bolt size tire 1. Remove the center cap. Loose items can fly around the interior in a
Spacer
All models crash and can seriously injure the
Cone
2. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire occupants.
well.
3. Remove the spacer cone from the wing Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely
bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the before driving.
bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
For compact spare tire
4. Securely put the jack and wheel nut wrench
back in the tool case. Store the case in the
trunk.

320
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

U.S. models 1TPMS and the Spare Tire

■ TPMS and the Spare Tire The system cannot monitor the pressure of the spare
tire. Manually check the spare tire pressure to be sure
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator that it is correct.
comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the
indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on. CHECK TPMS Use TPMS specific wheels. Each is equipped with a
SYSTEM appears on the i-MID, but this is normal. tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind
the valve stem.
If you replace the tire with a specified regular tire, the warning message on the i-MID
and the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will go off after a few miles (kilometers).

Handling the Unexpected

321
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

Models with tire repair kit

Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire 1Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
This vehicle is not equipped with a spare tire. If the tire has a large cut or is otherwise The kit should not be used in the following situations.
severely damaged, you will need to have the vehicle towed. If the tire only has a Instead, contact a dealer or a roadside assistant to
small puncture, from a nail for instance, you can use the temporary tire repair kit so have the vehicle towed.
that you can drive to the nearest service station for a more permanent repair. • The tire sealant has expired.
• More than two tires are punctured.
• The puncture or cut is larger than 3/16 inch (4mm).
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually • The tire side wall is damaged or the puncture is
to reduce speed. Then stop in a safe place. outside the tire contact area.

1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface and apply the parking When the puncture is: Kit Use
brake.
Handling the Unexpected

2. Put the shift lever in (P . Smaller than 3/16 inch

Yes
3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 . (4 mm)
Contact
u When towing a trailer, unhitch the trailer. Area Larger than 3/16 inch
No
(4 mm)
■ Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire
• Damage has been caused by driving with the tire
Pressure Gauge AIR ONLY side extremely under inflated.
• The tire bead is no longer seated.
Sealant/Air Hose (Clear) Inflator Switch
• The rim is damaged.

Tire Sealant Do not remove a nail or screw that punctured the

Expiration Date tire. If you remove it from the tire, you may not be
Pressure Relief able to repair the puncture using the kit.
Button Repair Notification Label
Instruction Power Plug
NOTICE
Manual
Do not use a puncture-repairing agent other than the
one provided in the kit that came with your vehicle. If
Air Only Hose (Black) Speed Restriction Label
a different agent is used, you may permanently
SEALANT/AIR side Selector Switch damage the tire pressure sensor.

322
Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

1. Open the trunk floor lid. 1Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire
When making a temporary repair, carefully read the
instruction manual provided with the kit.

In cold temperatures, the sealant may not flow easily.

In this situation, warm it up for five minutes before
using.

2. Take the kit out of the case.

u Place the kit face up, on flat ground near

Handling the Unexpected

the flat tire, and away from traffic. Do
not place the kit on its side.

Continued 323
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

1Injecting Sealant and Air

■ Injecting Sealant and Air
Valve Cap 1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve 3 WARNING
stem. Tire sealant contains substances that are
harmful and can be fatal if swallowed.

If accidentally swallowed, do not induce

vomiting. Drink plenty of water and get
medical attention immediately.
For skin or eye contact, flush with cool
Valve Stem water and get medical attention if
Handling the Unexpected

Sealant/Air Hose 2. Remove the sealant/air hose from the necessary.

packaging.
In cold temperatures, the sealant may not flow easily.
In this situation, warm it up for five minutes before
using.

The sealant can permanently stain clothing and other

materials. Be careful during handling and wipe away
any spills immediately.

Sealant/Air Hose 3. Attach the sealant/air hose onto the tire

valve stem. Screw it until it is tight.

Valve Stem

324
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

4. Plug in the compressor to the accessory 1Injecting Sealant and Air

power socket.
u Be careful not to pinch the cord in a 3 WARNING
door or window. Running the engine with the vehicle in an
5. Start the engine. enclosed or even partly enclosed area can
u Keep the engine running while injecting cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon
sealant and air. monoxide.
2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 62
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
6. Turn the selector switch to SEALANT/ Only run the engine to power the air
AIR. compressor with the vehicle outdoors.

Handling the Unexpected

NOTICE
Do not operate the tire repair kit compressor for
more than 15 minutes. The accessory power socket
and compressor can overheat and become
permanently damaged.
SEALANT/AIR side
Until the sealant injection is complete, the pressure
Pressure Gauge 7. Press the inflator switch to turn on the
shown on the pressure gauge will appear higher than
compressor. actual. After the sealant injection is complete the
u The compressor starts injecting sealant pressure will drop and then begin to rise again as the
and air into the tire. tire is inflated with air. This is normal. To accurately
8. When the sealant injection is complete, measure the air pressure using the gauge, turn the air
ON compressor off only after the sealant injection is
continue to add air.
complete.
9. After the air pressure reaches 32 psi (220
OFF kPa), turn off the kit. If the required air pressure is not reached within 10
u To check the pressure, occasionally turn minutes, the tire may be too severely damaged for
off the compressor and read the gauge. the kit to provide the necessary seal and your vehicle
will need to be towed.

Continued 325
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

Sealant/Air Hose 10. Unplug the power plug from the accessory 1Injecting Sealant and Air
power socket. See a Honda dealer for a replacement sealant bottle
11. Unscrew the sealant/air hose from the tire and proper disposal of an empty bottle.
valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.
12. Press the pressure relief button until the
gauge returns 0 psi (0 kpa).

Valve Stem

Repair Notification Label 13. Apply the repair notification label to the
flat surface of the wheel.
Handling the Unexpected

u The wheel surface must be clean to

ensure the label adheres properly.

■ Distributing the Sealant in the Tire 1Distributing the Sealant in the Tire
1. Apply the speed restriction label to the Stop and recheck the air pressure after every 10
location as shown. minutes of driving as necessary until you reach the
nearest service station where you should have the tire
2. Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes.
permanently repaired or replaced.
u Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
3. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.

Speed Restriction Label

326
Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

4. Recheck the air pressure using the air only 1Distributing the Sealant in the Tire
hose on the compressor.
5. Turn the selector switch to AIR ONLY. 3 WARNING
u Do not turn the air compressor on to Running the engine with the vehicle in an
check the pressure. enclosed or even partly enclosed area can
2 Inflating An Under-inflated Tire P. 328 cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon
6. If the air pressure is: monoxide.
• Less than 19 psi (130 kPa):
Air Only Hose Do not add air or continue driving. The Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can
leak is too severe. Call for help and have cause unconsciousness and even death.
your vehicle towed. Only run the engine to power the air

Handling the Unexpected

2 Emergency Towing P. 344 compressor with the vehicle outdoors.
• 32 psi (220 kPa) or more:
Continue driving for another 10 minutes
or until you reach the nearest service
station. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
uIf the air does not go down after the 10
minute driving, you do not need to check
the pressure any more.
• Greater than 19 psi (130kPa), but less
than 32 psi (220 kPa):
Turn the air compressor on to inflate the
tire until the tire pressure reaches 32 psi
(220 kPa).
Then drive carefully for 10 more minutes
or until you reach the nearest service
station. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
uYou should repeat this procedure as long
as the air pressure is within this range.
7. Repackage and properly stow the kit.
Continued 327
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

1Inflating An Under-inflated Tire

■ Inflating An Under-inflated Tire
NOTICE
You can use the kit to inflate a non-punctured under-inflated tire.
Do not operate the temporary tire repair kit
1. Open the trunk floor lid. compressor for more than 15 minutes. The accessory
2 Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair
power socket and compressor can overheat and
the Flat Tire P. 322 become permanently damaged.
2. Remove the kit from the case.
u Place the kit on flat ground near the tire
to be inflated, away from traffic.
3. Place the kit, face up, on flat ground near
the flat tire, away from traffic. Do not
Air Only Hose place the kit on its side.
Handling the Unexpected

4. Remove the air only hose from the kit.

5. Remove the valve cap.

Valve Cap
Air Only Hose 6. Attach the air only hose onto the tire valve
stem. Screw it until it is tight.

Valve Stem
328
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

7. Plug in the kit to the accessory power 1Inflating An Under-inflated Tire

socket.
u Be careful not to pinch the cord in a 3 WARNING
door or window. Running the engine with the vehicle in an
8. Start the engine. enclosed or even partly enclosed area can
u Keep the engine running while injecting cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon
air. monoxide.
2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 62
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can
9. Turn the selector switch to AIR ONLY. cause unconsciousness and even death.
AIR ONLY
side 10. Press the inflator switch to turn on the kit. Only run the engine to power the air

Handling the Unexpected

u The compressor starts to inject air into compressor with the vehicle outdoors.
the tire.
11. Inflate the tire to the specified air pressure.
ON

12. Turn off the kit.

u Check the pressure gauge on the air
compressor.
u If overinflated, press the pressure relief
button.
13. Unplug the kit from the accessory power
socket.
14. Unscrew the air only hose from the tire
valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.
Pressure Relief Button 15. Press the pressure relief button until the
gauge returns 0 psi (0 kpa).
16. Repackage and properly stow the kit.

329
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Engine Does Not Start

Checking the Engine
If the engine does not start, check the starter. 1Checking the Engine
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an
assisting vehicle to jump start it.
2 Jump Starting P. 331

Starter condition Checklist

Starter doesn’t turn or turns Check brightness of the interior light.
over slowly. Turn on interior lights and check brightness.
The battery may be dead. Check ● If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all

each of the items on the right and 2 Battery P. 306

respond accordingly. ● If the interior lights come on normally
Handling the Unexpected

2 Fuses P. 341
The starter turns over normally Review the engine start procedure.
but the engine doesn’t start. Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again.
There may be a problem with the 2 Starting the Engine P. 223
fuse. Check each of the items on Check the immobilizer system indicator.
the right and respond accordingly. When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.
2 Immobilizer System P. 112
Check the fuel level.
There should be enough fuel in the tank.
2 Fuel Gauge P. 77
Check the fuse.
Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 343
If the problem continues:
2 Emergency Towing P. 344

330
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Jump Starting

1Jump Starting
■ Jump Starting Procedure
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine, 3 WARNING
then open the hood. A battery can explode if you do not follow
1.8 ℓ engine models 1. Connect the first jumper cable to your the correct procedure, seriously injuring
vehicle's battery + terminal. anyone nearby.
2. Connect the other end of the first jumper
cable to the booster battery + terminal. Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking
u Use a 12-volt booster battery only. materials away from the battery.
3. Connect the second jumper cable to the
booster battery - terminal. Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they

Handling the Unexpected

Booster Battery do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be
careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the
2.4 ℓ engine models cable ends to touch each other while attaching or
detaching the jumper cables.

Booster Battery

Continued 331
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuJump Startingu

1.8 ℓ engine models 4. Connect the other end of the second 1Jump Starting
jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and
as shown. may prevent the engine from starting.
Do not connect this jumper cable to any
other part.
5. If your vehicle is connected to another
vehicle, start the assisting vehicle's engine
and increase its rpm slightly.
6. Attempt to start your vehicle's engine. If it
2.4 ℓ engine models turns over slowly, check that the jumper
cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
Handling the Unexpected

332
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuJump Startingu

■ What to Do After the Engine Starts

Once your vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following
order.

1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's ground.

2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery -
terminal.
3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's battery + terminal.
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal.

Handling the Unexpected

Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.

333
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Shift Lever Does Not Move

Automatic transmission models

Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P
position.

■ Releasing the Lock

1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flat-
tip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock
release slot as shown in the image, and
Slot
Handling the Unexpected

remove the cover.

Cover

4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.

5. While pushing the key down, press the shift
lever release button and place the shift lever
into (N .
Release u The lock is now released. Have the shift
Button lever checked by a dealer as soon as
Shift Lock
Release Slot possible.

334
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows: 1How to Handle Overheating
• The high temperature indicator comes on or the engine suddenly loses power.
• Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment. 3 WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated
■ First thing to do engine can seriously scald you.
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights. Do not open the hood if steam is coming
u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood. out.
u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.
Then open the hood. NOTICE
Continuing to drive with the high temperature

Handling the Unexpected

indicator on may damage the engine.

Continued 335
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating

■ Next thing to do 1How to Handle Overheating

1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
MAX
stop the engine once the high temperature 3 WARNING
indicator goes off. Removing the radiator cap while the
u If the cooling fan is not operating, engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
immediately stop the engine. out, seriously scalding you.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling Always let the engine and radiator cool
Reserve system components for leaks. down before removing the radiator cap.
MIN Tank u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is
low, add coolant until it reaches the If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Handling the Unexpected

MAX mark.
u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.
check that the radiator is cool. Cover the Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze
as soon as possible.
radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open
the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to
the base of the filler neck, and put the
cap back on.

■ Last thing to do
Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the high temperature
indicator.
If the high temperature indicator is off, resume driving. If it stays on, contact a dealer
for repairs.

336
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on 1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low. NOTICE
■ What to do as soon as the indicator comes on Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place. serious mechanical damage almost immediately.
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
■ What to do after parking the vehicle
1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about one minute.
2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
u Add oil as necessary.
3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator.
u The light goes out: Start driving again.

Handling the Unexpected

u The light does not go out within 10 seconds: Stop the engine and
contact a dealer for repairs immediately.

If the Charging System Indicator Comes On

1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the battery is not being charged. If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the
engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
the battery.
Turn off the heating and cooling system */climate control system *, rear
defogger, and other electrical systems, and immediately contact a dealer
for repairs.

* Not available on all models 337

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or

Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink 1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
• Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control NOTICE
system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose. If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,
• Blinks when engine misfiring is detected. the emissions control system and the engine could be
■ What to do when the indicator lamp comes on damaged.
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when
dealer.
restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at
■ What to do when the indicator lamp blinks 31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least inspected.
ten minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.
Handling the Unexpected

■ Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message

■ The message appears on when:
An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being
loose or not being installed.

■ What to do when the message appears:

1. Stop the engine.
2. Check that the fuel fill cap is fully installed.
u If not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once.
3. Drive for several days of normal driving.
u The message should go off.

■ When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on

Malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of
gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures described
above.

338
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator Comes On

If the Brake System Indicator Comes On

U.S. ■ Reasons for the indicator to come on 1If the Brake System Indicator Comes On
• The brake fluid is low. Have your vehicle repaired immediately.
• There is a malfunction in the brake system. It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there
Canada ■ What to do when the indicator comes on while driving is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop
Press the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure. immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift
the gears.
• If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
• If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking. on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution
system is not working. This can result in vehicle
instability under sudden braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.

Handling the Unexpected

If the EPS System Indicator Comes On
1If the EPS System Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system. NOTICE
• If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an
extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel on
speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and
the full left or right position for a while, the system
sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate. heats up. The system goes into a protective mode,
■ What to do when the indicator comes on and limits its performance. The steering wheel
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine. becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle system cools down, the EPS system is restored.
inspected by a dealer. Repeated operation under these conditions can
eventually damage the system.

339
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

U.S. models
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or
Blinks
1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink
A tire pressure is significantly low. If there is a problem with the TPMS or NOTICE
the compact spare tire * is installed, the indicator blinks for about one Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause
it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always
minute, and then stays on.
inflate your tires to the prescribed level.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on
the driver side doorjamb.
■ What to do when the indicator blinks
Handling the Unexpected

Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact

spare tire * causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire.
The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers).

340 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

Fuses
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working, ■ Circuit protected and fuse rating Circuit Protected Amps
turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 and 11 Oil Level 7.5 A
Circuit Protected Amps
check to see if any applicable fuse is blown. 12 Fog Lights * (20 A)
EPS 70 A
− − 13 Driver’s Power Seat Sliding * (20 A)
■ Engine Compartment Fuse Box ABS/VSA Motor 30 A 14 Hazard 10 A
1
Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push ABS/VSA FSR 30 A 15 FI Sub 15 A
the tabs to open the box. − − 16 IG Coil 15 A
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box Main Fuse 100 A 15 A*1
17 Stop
cover. Locate the fuse in question by the IG Main 50 A 10 A*2
fuse number and box cover number. Fuse Box Main 60 A 18 Horn 10 A

Handling the Unexpected

Fuse Box Main 2 60 A 19 Premium Amp * (20 A)
Headlight Main 30 A 20 INJ (15 A)
− − 21 IGP 15 A
2 Rear Defogger 30 A 22 DBW 15 A
− − 23 H/L LO 20 A
Blower 40 A Driver’s Power Seat
24 (20 A)
− − Reclining *
Sub Fan Motor 20 A 25 MG Clutch 7.5 A
Main Fan Motor 20 A 26 − −
3 − − 27 SMALL 20 A
4 Left Headlight Low Beam 10 A 28 Interior Lights 7.5 A
5 ST MG 7.5 A 29 Backup 10 A
6 Right Headlight Low Beam 10 A *1:1.8 ℓ models
7 − − *2:2.4 ℓ models
8 − −
9 − −
10 − −

* Not available on all models Continued 341

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuFusesuFuse Locations

■ Interior Fuse Box Circuit Protected Amps Circuit Protected Amps

10 − − 33 Door Lock Motor 1 (Lock) 15 A
Located under the dashboard.
11 Moonroof * (20 A) 34 Small Lights 7.5 A
Accessory Power Socket 35 Illumination 7.5 A
12 (20 A)
(Center Console) * 36 − −
13 − − 37 − −
14 Seat Heaters * (15 A) 38 Left Headlight High Beam 10 A
Driver’s Door Lock Motor 39 Right Headlight High Beam 10 A
15 (10 A)
(Unlock) * 40 TPMS * (7.5 A)
Fuse Label 16 − − 41 Door Lock 20 A
17 − −
Handling the Unexpected

42 Driver’s Power Window 20 A

Fuse locations are shown on the label on 18 − − Rear Passenger’s Side
43 (20 A)
the side panel. 19 ACC 7.5 A Power Window
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse 20 ACC Key Lock 7.5 A Front Passenger’s Side
44 20 A
number and label number. 21 Daytime Running Lights 7.5 A Power Window
22 HAC 7.5 A Rear Driver’s Side Power
45 (20 A)
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating 23 HAC* (7.5 A) Window
24 ABS/VSA 7.5 A 46 Wiper 30 A
Circuit Protected Amps
25 − − − STS * (7.5 A)
1 HAC Option * (20 A)
2 ACG 10 A 26 − −
3 SRS 10 A Accessory Power Socket
27 20 A
(Front)
4 Fuel Pump 15 A
28 Washer 15 A
5 Meter 7.5 A
29 ODS 7.5 A
6 Power Window 7.5 A
Driver’s Door Lock Motor
7 VB SOL * (15 A) 30 (10 A)
(Lock) *
8 Door Lock Motor 2 (Unlock) 15 A
31 − −
9 Door Lock Motor 1 (Unlock) 15 A
32 Door Lock Motor 2 (Lock) 15 A
342 * Not available on all models
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses

Inspecting and Changing Fuses

1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 . Turn 1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
Blown Fuse headlights and all accessories off. NOTICE
2. Remove the fuse box cover. Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating
3. Check the large fuse in the engine greatly increases the chances of damaging the
compartment. electrical system.
u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified
Combined amperage.
replace it with a new one.
Fuse Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on
P. 341 to 342.
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine
Fuse Puller compartment and the vehicle interior. There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine

Handling the Unexpected

u If there is a burned out fuse, remove it compartment fuse box cover.
with the fuse puller and replace it with a
new one.

343
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Emergency Towing

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle. 1Emergency Towing
NOTICE
■ Flat bed equipment Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck. cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
This is the best way to transport your vehicle. to support the vehicle's weight.

■ Wheel lift equipment NOTICE

The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off Improper towing such as towing behind a
the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the
transmission.
tow your vehicle.
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.
Handling the Unexpected

It is very dangerous, since ropes or chains may shift

from side to side or break.

344
 Main Menu

Information
This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.

Specifications .................................... 346 Emissions Testing

Identification Numbers Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 353
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)...... 350 Warranty Coverages ........................ 355
Engine Number and Transmission Authorized Manuals......................... 357
Number...................................... 350 Customer Service Information......... 358
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 351
Reporting Safety Defects ................. 352

345
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Specifications

1.8 ℓ engine models ■ Engine Specifications ■ Light Bulbs

■ Vehicle Specifications Displacement 110 cu-in (1,798 cm3) Headlights (Low Beam) 51W (HB4)
Model Honda Civic 4-Door NGK DILZKR7B11GS Headlights (High Beam) 60W (HB3)
Spark Plugs
No. of Passengers: DENSO DXU22HCR-D11S Fog Lights * 55W (H11)
Front 2 ■ Fuel Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side
28/8W
Rear 3 Marker Lights
Fuel: Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
Total 5 Type of 87 or higher Brake/Taillights 21/5W
Weights: Fuel Tank Capacity 13.2 US gal (50 ℓ) Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W (Amber)
Rear Side Marker Lights LED
Gross Vehicle U.S.: 3,693 lbs (1,675 kg)*1 ■ Battery
Weight Rating Canada: 1,675 kg*1 Back-Up Lights 16W
Capacity/Type 38AH(5)/47AH(20) Taillights 3CP
U.S.: 3,748 lbs (1,700 kg)*2
Canada: 1,700 kg*2 ■ Washer Fluid High-Mount Brake Light 21W
U.S.: 3,792 lbs (1,720 kg)*3 U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ) Rear License Plate Lights 5W
Canada: 1,720 kg*3 Tank Capacity
Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 ℓ) Trunk Light 5W
Canada: 1,755 kg*4
Interior Lights
Gross Axle Weight
Map Lights 8W
Rating (Front) U.S.: 1,985 lbs (900 kg)*1
Canada: 900 kg*1 Ceiling Light 8W
U.S.: 2,018 lbs (915 kg)*2
Canada: 915 kg*2
U.S.: 2,029 lbs (920 kg)*3
Canada: 920 kg*3
Canada: 940 kg*4
Gross Axle Weight
Information

Rating (Rear) U.S.: 1,742 lbs (790 kg)*1

Canada: 790 kg*1
U.S.: 1,753 lbs (795 kg)*2
Canada: 795 kg*2
U.S.: 1,786 lbs (810 kg)*3
Canada: 810 kg*3
Canada: 825 kg*4
Air Conditioning:
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Charge Quantity 13.2 – 15.0 oz (375 – 425 g)
Lubricant Type SP-10
*1: LX-MT, HF, and Canadian DX models
*2: LX-AT models
*3: EX and U.S. EX-L models
*4: Canadian Touring models

346 * Not available on all models

 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuSpecificationsu

■ Brake/Clutch Fluid ■ Engine Oil ■ Tire

Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 ·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20 P195/65R15 89H*1, *2
Recommended
■ Automatic Transmission Fluid ·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Size
P195/65R15 89S*3
Change 3.7 US qt (3.5 ℓ) P205/55R16 89H*4
Honda ATF DW-1 Regular
Specified Change P215/45R17 87V*5
(automatic transmission fluid) Capacity
including 3.9 US qt (3.7 ℓ) Pressure 30 (210 [2.1])*1, *2
Capacity Change 2.5 US qt (2.4 ℓ)
filter psi(kPa[kgf/cm2]) 32 (220 [2.2])*3, *4, *5
■ Manual Transmission Fluid
■ Engine Coolant Compact
Size T135/80D15 99M
Specified Honda Manual Transmission Fluid Pressure
Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2 Spare * 60 (420 [4.2])
Capacity Change 1.5 US qt (1.4 ℓ) psi(kPa[kgf/cm2])
Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
15 x 6J*1, *3
1.48 US gal (5.59 ℓ)
15 x 6 1/2J*2
Capacity (change including the remaining Regular
Wheel Size 16 x 6 1/2J*4
0.125 US gal (0.475 ℓ) in the reserve tank)
17 x 7J*5
Compact Spare * 15 x 4T
*1: Canadian DX models
*2: LX models
*3: HF model
*4: EX and U.S. EX-L models
*5: Canadian Touring models

Information
* Not available on all models Continued 347
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuSpecificationsu

2.4 ℓ engine models ■ Engine Specifications ■ Light Bulbs

■ Vehicle Specifications Displacement 144 cu-in (2,354 cm3) Headlights (Low Beam) 51W (HB4)
Model Honda Civic 4-Door NGK ILZKR7B-11S Headlights (High Beam) 60W (HB3)
Spark Plugs
No. of Passengers: DENSO SXU22HCR11S Fog Lights 35W (H8)
Front 2 ■ Fuel Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side
28/8W
Rear 3 Marker Lights
Fuel: Unleaded premium gasoline, Pump octane
Total 5 Type number of 91 or higher Brake/Taillights 21/5W
Weights: Fuel Tank Capacity 13.2 US gal (50 ℓ) Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W (Amber)
Rear Side Marker Lights LED
Gross Vehicle U.S.: 3,925 lbs (1,780 kg) ■ Battery
Weight Rating Canada: 1,780 kg Back-Up Lights 16W
Capacity/Type 38AH(5)/47AH(20) Taillights 3CP
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front) U.S.: 2,117 lbs (960 kg)
■ Washer Fluid High-Mount Brake Light LED
Canada: 960 kg U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ) Rear License Plate Lights 5W
Tank Capacity
Gross Axle Weight Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 ℓ) Trunk Light 5W
Rating (Rear) U.S.: 1,830 lbs (830 kg) Interior Lights
Canada: 830 kg Map Lights 8W
Air Conditioning: Ceiling Light 8W
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Charge Quantity 13.2 – 15.0 oz (375 – 425 g)
Lubricant Type SP-10
Information

348
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuSpecificationsu

■ Brake/Clutch Fluid ■ Engine Oil ■ Tire

Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 ·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20 P215/45R17 87V
Recommended Size
■ Manual Transmission Fluid ·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Regular
215/45ZR17 91W*1
Change 4.2 US qt (4.0 ℓ) Pressure
Specified Honda Manual Transmission Fluid 32 (220 [2.2])
Change psi(kPa[kgf/cm2])
Capacity Change 2.0 US qt (1.9 ℓ) Capacity
including 4.4 US qt (4.2 ℓ) Size T135/80D16 101M
Compact
filter Pressure
Spare 60 (420 [4.2])
■ Engine Coolant psi(kPa[kgf/cm2])
Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2 Regular 17 x 7J
Wheel Size
Ratio 50/50 with distilled water Compact Spare 16 x 4T
1.45 US gal (5.5 ℓ) *1: Optional for U.S. models (summer tires)
Capacity (change including the remaining
0.125 US gal (0.475 ℓ) in the reserve tank)

Information
349
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. See the
image below for the VIN locations.

Engine Number and Transmission Number

See the image below for the locations of your vehicle's engine number and
transmission number.

Vehicle Identification Number

1.8 ℓ engine models

Engine Number

Manual Transmission
Number
Automatic Transmission
Number
Information

Certification Label/
Vehicle Identification
Number
2.4 ℓ engine models

Engine Number

Manual Transmission
Number

350
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Devices that Emit Radio Waves

The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in
operation.
Audio System
Bluetooth® Audio
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Immobilizer System
Remote Transmitter
U.S. models
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required
standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada
Standard, described below:

As required by the FCC:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any

Information
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-Gen/210/310. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
351
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Reporting Safety Defects

In the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.

In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
Information

If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.

To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For
more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.

352
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle uses “readiness codes,” as part of its onboard self diagnostic system. 1Testing of Readiness Codes
Some states refer to these codes during testing to see if your vehicle's emissions The readiness codes are erased when the battery is
components are working properly. disconnected, and set again only after several days of
The codes may not be read if you go through the testing just after the battery has driving under a variety of conditions.
gone dead or been disconnected.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness
codes are not set, you may be requested to return at
To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON (w , without starting the a later date to complete the test.
engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are If the testing facility determines the readiness codes
not set. are still not set, see a dealer.

If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,
prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:

1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.

2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20

Information
seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in (P (automatic transmission) or (N (manual transmission).
Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about 3 minutes.
6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.

Continued 353
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes

7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in
(D (automatic) or 5th (manual). Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows,
drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may
vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds
because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions
allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal
or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
Information

354
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Warranty Coverages

■ U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:

New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the
emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and
workmanship.

Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance

Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.
Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for
exact information.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered
by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered for
rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.

Information
Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this
warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other
factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts

against defects in materials and workmanship.

Continued 355
 Main Menu Table of Contents

uuWarranty Coveragesu

Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a

replacement battery purchased from a dealer.

Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as

long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.

Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda
warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on
warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.
Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

■ Canadian Owners
Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
Information

356
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Authorized Manuals

■ Service Express 1Authorized Manuals

For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to For Canadian Owners:
Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options. Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you
may require.
■ For U.S. Owners:
Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by
phone at (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.

Information
357
 Main Menu Table of Contents

Customer Service Information

Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals. 1Customer Service Information

When you call or write, please give us the following
They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that information:
your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the • Vehicle Identification Number
dealership's service manager or general manager. If you are dissatisfied with the 2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
P. 350
decision made by the dealership's management, contact Honda Customer Services.
• Date of purchase
• Odometer reading of your vehicle
• Your name, address, and telephone number
U.S. Owners: Canadian Owners: • A detailed description of the problem
American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Canada Inc. • Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
Honda Automobile Customer Services Customer Relations
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A 180 Honda Boulevard
1919 Torrance Blvd. Markham, ON
Torrance, CA 90501-2746 L6C 0H9
Tel: (800) 999-1009 Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-mail: [email protected]

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin

Information

Islands:
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546

358
 Main Menu

Index
Index
A Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 308 Security Code.......................................... 152
Heating ................................................... 143 Theft Protection ...................................... 152
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).................. 243
Air Pressure ............................... 298, 347, 349 USB Adapter Cable.................................. 151
Accessories and Modifications ................ 251
Airbags ........................................................ 37 USB Flash Drives ...................................... 180
Accessory Power Sockets ......................... 139
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 43 Authorized Manuals ................................ 357
Additives
After a Collision......................................... 40 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking................. 105
Coolant .................................................. 275
Airbag Care............................................... 49 Customize......................................... 91, 106
Engine Oil ............................................... 268
Event Data Recorder .................................. 22 Automatic Lighting .................................. 119
Washer ................................................... 281
Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 40 Automatic Transmission........................... 226
Additives, Engine Oil ............................... 268
Indicator.............................................. 47, 69 Creeping ................................................. 226
Adjusting
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 48 Fluid........................................................ 277
Armrest .................................................. 134
Sensors...................................................... 37 Kickdown................................................ 226
Front Seats.............................................. 127
Side Airbags .............................................. 44 Operating the Shift Lever................... 16, 228
Head Restraints....................................... 130
Side Curtain Airbags.................................. 46 Shift Lever Does Not Move ...................... 334
Mirrors.................................................... 126
AM/FM Radio .................................... 154, 159 Shifting ................................................... 227
Rear Seats............................................... 133
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 243 Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 151
Steering Wheel ....................................... 125
Indicator.................................................... 69 Average Fuel Economy ........................ 80, 83
Temperature ............................................. 84
Armrest ..................................................... 134 Average Speed ........................................... 83
Air Conditioning System
Audio Remote Controls............................ 157
(Climate Control System) ....................... 146
Audio System ............................................ 150
Changing the Mode................................ 147
Adjusting the Sound........................ 153, 158
B
Defrosting the Windshield
Auxiliary Input Jack .................................. 151 Battery ...................................................... 306
and Windows........................................ 147
Error Messages ........................................ 175 Charging System Indicator................. 67, 337
Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 308 Jump Starting.......................................... 331
General Information ................................ 178
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode................... 147
Internet Radio.......................................... 168 Maintenance (Checking the Battery)........ 306
Sensor .................................................... 148
MP3/WMA ...................................... 155, 162 Maintenance (Replacing) ......................... 307

Index
Using Automatic Climate Control............ 146 Belts (Seat) .................................................. 30
MP3/WMA/AAC ...................................... 170
Air Conditioning System
Reactivating............................................. 152 Beverage Holders ..................................... 138
(Heating and Cooling System)............... 142
Recommended CDs ................................. 178 Bluetooth® Audio ..................................... 173
Cooling................................................... 144 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..................... 181
Recommended Devices............................ 180
Defrosting the Windshield
Remote Controls ..................................... 157 Booster Seats (For Children) ...................... 61
and Windows........................................ 145
359
 Main Menu

Brake System............................................. 241 Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 111 High Temperature Indicator ...................... 69
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 243 Child Seat.................................................... 50 Low Temperature Indicator ....................... 73
Brake Assist System ................................. 244 Booster Seats ............................................ 61 Overheating............................................ 335
Fluid ........................................................ 280 Child Seat for Infants................................. 52 Creeping (Automatic Transmission)........ 226
Foot Brake ............................................... 242 Child Seat for Small Children..................... 53 Cruise Control .......................................... 233
Indicator ............................................ 66, 339 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Indicator ................................................... 74
Parking Brake .......................................... 241 Seat Belt.................................................. 57 Cup Holders.............................................. 138
Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) .... 123 Larger Children ......................................... 60 Customer Service Information ................ 358
Bulb Replacement..................................... 282 Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 52 Customized Features ................................. 85
Brake/Taillights, Rear Turn Signal Lights and Selecting a Child Seat................................ 54
Rear Side Marker Lights ......................... 291 Using a Tether........................................... 59
Fog Lights................................................ 286 Childproof Door Locks ............................. 104
D
Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 311 Daytime Running Lights .......................... 121
Lights..................................................... 289 Cleaning the Interior................................ 309 Dead Battery ............................................ 331
Headlights ............................................... 282 Climate Control System............................ 146 Defrosting the Windshield
High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 294 Changing the Mode ................................ 146 and Windows ................................. 145, 147
Rear License Plate Lights .......................... 293 Defrosting the Windshield Devices that Emit Radio Waves ............... 351
Taillights and Back-Up Lights ................... 292 and Windows ........................................ 147 Dimming
Bulb Specifications............................ 346, 348 Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 308 Headlights .............................................. 118
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 147 Rearview Mirror ...................................... 126
Sensors ................................................... 148 Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................ 269
C Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 146 Directional Signals (Turn Signal)............. 118
Carbon Monoxide Gas................................ 62 Clock............................................................ 98 Display/Information Button ...................... 81
Carrying Cargo.................................. 215, 217 Clutch Fluid............................................... 280 Door Mirrors............................................. 126
CD Player ........................................... 155, 162 Coat Hook................................................. 140 Doors .......................................................... 99
Center Pocket............................................ 137 Compact Spare Tire .................. 315, 347, 349 Auto Door Locking.................................. 105
Index

Certification Label .................................... 350 Console Compartment ............................. 136 Auto Door Unlocking .............................. 105
Changing Bulbs......................................... 282 Controls....................................................... 97 Door Open Indicator ........................... 29, 70
Charging System Indicator ................. 67, 337 Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 275 Keys.......................................................... 99
Child Safety ................................................. 50 Adding to the Radiator............................ 276 Locking/Unlocking the Doors
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 104 Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 275 from the Inside...................................... 103

360
 Main Menu

Locking/Unlocking the Doors Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 275 Fog Light Indicator..................................... 72
from the Outside................................... 101 High Temperature Indicator ....................... 69 Folding Down the Rear Seats .................. 133
Lockout Prevention System ..................... 102 Low Temperature Indicator ........................ 73 Foot Brake ................................................ 242
DOT Tire Quality Grading........................ 300 Overheating ............................................ 335 Front Airbags (SRS)..................................... 40
Driving ...................................................... 213 Engine Oil ................................................. 268 Front Seats ................................................ 127
Automatic Transmission .......................... 226 Adding .................................................... 271 Adjusting ................................................ 127
Braking ................................................... 241 Checking ................................................. 269 Fuel...................................................... 17, 247
Cruise Control ........................................ 233 Displaying Oil Life ............................ 257, 261 Economy ................................................. 250
Shifting Gear .................................. 227, 229 Low Oil Pressure Indicator.................. 66, 337 Gauge....................................................... 77
Starting the Engine ................................. 223 Recommended Engine Oil........................ 268 Instant Fuel Economy .......................... 77, 84
Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 308 EPS (Electric Power Steering) Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 68
System ............................................... 71, 339 Range ................................................. 80, 83
Exhaust Gas Hazard Recommendation .................................... 247
E (Carbon Monoxide) .................................. 62 Refueling................................................. 247
Eco Assist System.......................................... 7 Exterior Care (Cleaning) ........................... 311 Fuel Economy ........................................... 250
ECON Button ............................................ 232 Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 126 Fuel Fill Cap ........................................ 17, 249
Elapsed Time .............................................. 83 Message.................................................. 338
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 17, 248
Indicator ........................................... 71, 339 F Fuses.......................................................... 341
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............ 236 Features..................................................... 149 Inspecting and Changing......................... 343
Emergency................................................ 344 Filters Locations......................................... 341, 342
Emergency Trunk Opener ....................... 111 Dust and Pollen ....................................... 308
Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ...... 353 Oil ........................................................... 272
Engine....................................................... 350 Flat Tire ..................................................... 315 G
Coolant .................................................. 275 Floor Mats ................................................. 310 Gasoline (Fuel)
Jump Starting ......................................... 331 Fluids Economy ................................................. 250

Index
Oil .......................................................... 268 Automatic Transmission........................... 277 Gauge....................................................... 77
Starting................................................... 223 Brake/Clutch............................................ 280 Information ............................................. 247
Switch Buzzer ......................................... 117 Engine Coolant........................................ 275 Instant Fuel Economy .......................... 77, 84
Engine Coolant ........................................ 275 Manual Transmission ............................... 278 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 68
Adding to the Radiator ........................... 276 Windshield Washer.................................. 281 Refueling................................................. 247

361
 Main Menu

Gauges......................................................... 77 Headlights................................................. 118 Daytime Running Lights ............................ 71

Gear Shift Lever Positions Aiming .................................................... 282 Door Open.......................................... 29, 70
Automatic Transmission........................... 227 Automatic Operation............................... 119 ECON Mode ..................................... 74, 232
Manual Transmission ............................... 230 Dimming ......................................... 118, 121 EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Glass (care) ................................................ 312 Operating................................................ 118 System ............................................ 71, 339
Glove Box .................................................. 136 Heaters (Seat) ........................................... 141 Fog Light .................................................. 72
Heating and Cooling System ................... 142 High Beam................................................ 72
Cooling ................................................... 144 High Temperature..................................... 69
H Defrosting the Windshield Immobilizer System ................................... 73
Halogen Bulbs................................... 282, 286 and Windows ........................................ 145 i-VTEC ................................................ 74, 78
Handling the Unexpected ........................ 313 Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 308 Lights On .................................................. 72
HandsFreeLink® (HFL) ............................... 181 Heating ................................................... 143 Low Fuel ................................................... 68
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and HFL (HandsFreeLink®)............................... 181 Low Oil Pressure ............................... 66, 337
Call History ............................................ 197 High Beam Indicator .................................. 72 Low Temperature...................................... 73
Automatic Transferring ............................ 195 Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ............ 71, 238, 239
Caller’s ID Information ............................. 195 Maintenance Minder......................... 74, 257
HFL Buttons ............................................. 181 I Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............. 67, 338
HFL Menus .............................................. 183 Identification Numbers ............................ 350 Parking Brake and Brake System ....... 66, 339
HFL Status Display.................................... 182 Engine and Transmission ......................... 350 REV..................................................... 74, 78
Limitations for Manual Operation ............ 182 Vehicle Identification ............................... 350 Seat Belt Reminder.............................. 31, 68
Making a Call .......................................... 201 Ignition Switch ......................................... 117 Security System Alarm............................... 73
Options During a Call .............................. 206 Illumination Control................................. 123 Shift Lever Position.................................... 67
Phone Setup ............................................ 188 Knob....................................................... 123 Supplemental Restraint System ........... 47, 69
Receiving a Call ....................................... 205 i-MID ........................................................... 81 System Message ....................................... 72
Speed Dial ............................................... 198 Immobilizer System .................................. 112 Transmission ............................................. 68
Text Message................................... 193, 207 Indicator.................................................... 73 Trunk Open .............................................. 71
Index

To Clear the System................................. 196 Indicators .................................................... 66 Turn Signal ............................................... 72

To Create a Security PIN........................... 194 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)..................... 69 VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist)
Hazard Warning Button............................... 2 Charging System ............................... 67, 337 System ............................................ 70, 236
Head Restraints......................................... 130 CRUISE CONTROL ............................. 74, 234 VSA® OFF.......................................... 70, 237
CRUISE MAIN .................................... 74, 233 Washer Level ............................................ 74

362
 Main Menu

Information .............................................. 345 L M

Information Display ................................... 79
Language (HFL)......................................... 182 Maintenance............................................. 253
Instant Fuel Economy .......................... 77, 84
LATCH (Child Seats) .................................... 55 Battery .................................................... 306
Instrument Panel........................................ 65
Lights ................................................. 118, 282 Brake/Clutch Fluid ................................... 280
Brightness Control .................................. 123
Automatic ............................................... 119 Cleaning ................................................. 309
intelligent Multi-Information Display
Bulb Replacement.................................... 282 Climate Control System........................... 308
(i-MID)....................................................... 81
Daytime Running Lights........................... 121 Coolant................................................... 275
Interior Lights........................................... 135
Fog Lights................................................ 121 Heating and Cooling System ................... 308
Interior Rearview Mirror ......................... 126
High Beam Indicator .................................. 72 Maintenance MinderTM ............................ 257
i-VTEC and REV Indicators ......................... 78
Interior .................................................... 135 Oil........................................................... 269
Light Switches ......................................... 118 Precautions ............................................. 254
J Lights On Indicator .................................... 72 Radiator .................................................. 276
Turn Signals............................................. 118 Remote Transmitter................................. 307
Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench)........................ 318
Jump Starting........................................... 331 Load Limits................................................ 217 Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 282
Locking/Unlocking ...................................... 99 Safety...................................................... 255
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking.................. 105 Service Items ................................... 259, 263
K Childproof Door Locks............................. 104 Tires ........................................................ 297
Key Number Tag ...................................... 100 From Inside.............................................. 103 Transmission Fluid ................................... 277
Keyless Lockout Prevention..................... 102 From Outside........................................... 101 Under the Hood ...................................... 265
Keys............................................................. 99 Keys .......................................................... 99 Malfunction Indicator Lamp.............. 67, 338
Lockout Prevention ................................. 102 Using a Key ............................................. 102 Manual Transmission ............................... 229
Master Keys .............................................. 99 Lockout Prevention System...................... 102 Map Lights ................................................ 135
Number Tag............................................ 100 Low Battery Charge.................................. 337 Maximum Load Limit ............................... 217
Rear Door Won’t Open ........................... 104 Low Fuel Indicator ...................................... 68 Meters, Gauges........................................... 77
Remote Transmitter ................................ 101 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 66, 337 Mirrors ...................................................... 126

Index
Types and Functions.................................. 99 Lower Anchors ............................................ 55 Adjusting ................................................ 126
Valet Key ................................................ 100 Lubricant Specifications Chart ......... 346, 348 Door ....................................................... 126
Won’t Turn ............................................... 20 Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 217 Exterior ................................................... 126
Kickdown (Automatic Transmission) ...... 226 Interior Rearview ..................................... 126
Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 251
Moonroof ................................................. 116
363
 Main Menu

MP3............................................ 155, 162, 170 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ................. 48 Tires........................................................ 303
Passing Indicators ..................................... 118 Wiper Blade Rubber ................................ 295
Power Windows ....................................... 114 Reporting Safety Defects......................... 352
N Precautions While Driving ....................... 225 Resetting a Trip Meter......................... 79, 82
Numbers (Identification) .......................... 350 Rain ........................................................ 225
Pregnant Women ....................................... 35
Puncture (Tire).................................. 315, 322
S
O Safe Driving................................................ 25
Odometer.............................................. 79, 82 Safety Check............................................... 29
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 268 R Safety Labels .............................................. 63
Adding .................................................... 271 Radiator .................................................... 276 Safety Message .......................................... 23
Checking ................................................. 269 Radio (AM/FM) ................................. 154, 159 Seat Belts .................................................... 30
Displaying Oil Life ............................ 257, 261 Radio Data System (RDS) ......................... 161 Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor ................. 34
Low Oil Pressure Indicator.................. 66, 337 Range .................................................... 80, 83 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 32
Recommended Engine Oil........................ 268 RDS (Radio Data System) ......................... 161 Checking .................................................. 36
Viscosity .................................................. 268 Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing)....... 353 Fastening .................................................. 33
Opening/Closing Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder
Hood ....................................................... 267 Button ..................................................... 124 Seat Belt ................................................. 57
Moonroof................................................ 116 Rear Seats (Folding Down) ...................... 133 Pregnant Women...................................... 35
Power Windows ...................................... 114 Rearview Camera ..................................... 246 Reminder .................................................. 31
Trunk....................................................... 109 Rearview Mirror ....................................... 126 Warning Indicator ............................... 31, 68
Outside Temperature Display .................... 84 Refueling .................................................. 247 Seat Heaters ............................................. 141
Overheating .............................................. 335 Fuel Gauge................................................ 77 Seats.......................................................... 127
Gasoline.................................. 247, 346, 348 Adjusting ................................................ 127
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 68 Front Seats.............................................. 127
P Regulations............................... 239, 300, 351 Rear Seats............................................... 133
Index

Pandora® ................................................... 169 Remote Transmitter ................................. 101 Seat Heaters ........................................... 141
Panic Mode ............................................... 113 Replacement Security System ........................................ 112
Parking ...................................................... 245 Battery .................................................... 307 Immobilizer System Indicator..................... 73
Parking Brake............................................ 241 Bulbs....................................................... 282 Security System Alarm Indicator ................ 73
Parking Brake and Brake System Fuses............................................... 341, 342
Indicator ............................................ 66, 339
364
 Main Menu

Select Lever ................................ 16, 227, 229 Switches Winter..................................................... 305

Operation ................................. 16, 228, 229 (Around the Steering Wheel) ........ 2, 3, 117 Tools.......................................................... 314
Releasing ................................................ 334 System Message Indicator .......................... 72 Towing a Trailer ....................................... 219
Won’t Move ........................................... 334 Equipment and Accessories ..................... 220
Select/Reset Knob ................................ 79, 82 Load Limits.............................................. 219
Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 54
T Towing Your Vehicle................................ 222
Selector Knob (Audio) ............................. 156 Tachometer ................................................. 77 Emergency .............................................. 344
Setting the Clock........................................ 98 Temperature TPMS
Shift Lever .................................. 16, 227, 229 High Temperature Indicator ....................... 69 (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) ........ 238
Shift Lever Position Indicator ............ 67, 228 Low Temperature Indicator ........................ 73 Indicator............................................ 71, 340
Shifting (Transmission) .................... 227, 229 Outside Temperature Display ..................... 84 Transmission ..................................... 227, 229
Shoulder Anchor ........................................ 34 Temperature Sensor ................................... 84 Automatic ............................................... 227
Side Airbags ............................................... 44 Text Message .................................... 193, 207 Fluid................................................ 277, 278
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 46 Time (Setting) ............................................. 98 Manual ................................................... 229
SMS Text Message............................ 193, 207 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Number................................................... 350
Snow Tires ................................................ 305 (TPMS) ..................................................... 238 Shift Lever Position Indicator.............. 67, 228
Spare Tire ................................. 315, 347, 349 Indicator............................................ 71, 340 Trip Meter............................................. 79, 82
Spark Plugs ....................................... 346, 348 Tire Repair Kit........................................... 322 Troubleshooting....................................... 313
Specifications ........................................... 346 Tires ........................................................... 297 Blown Fuse...................................... 341, 342
Specified Fuel ........................... 247, 346, 348 Air Pressure ............................. 298, 347, 349 Brake Pedal Vibrates.................................. 20
Speedometer.............................................. 77 Checking and Maintaining....................... 297 Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door.......... 21
SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................ 40 Inspection................................................ 297 Emergency Towing.................................. 344
Starting the Engine.................................. 223 Labeling .................................................. 298 Engine Won’t Start.................................. 330
Does Not Start ........................................ 330 Puncture (Flat Tire)................................... 315 Noise When Braking.................................. 21
Engine Switch Buzzer.............................. 117 Regulations ............................................. 300 Overheating ............................................ 335
Jump Starting ......................................... 331 Rotation .................................................. 304 Premium Gasoline ........................... 247, 348

Index
Steering Wheel ........................................ 125 Spare Tire ................................ 315, 347, 349 Puncture/Flat Tire ............................ 315, 322
Adjusting ................................................ 125 Summer .................................................. 305 Rear Door Won’t Open...................... 20, 104
Stopping ................................................... 245 Tire Chains .............................................. 305 Select Lever Won’t Move......................... 334
Summer Tires............................................ 305 Tire Repair Kit .......................................... 322 Warning Indicators .................................... 66
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ....... 40 Wear Indicators ....................................... 302

365
 Main Menu

Trunk ......................................................... 109 Warranties (Warranty Manual provided

Lid ........................................................... 109 separately) .............................................. 355
Light Bulb ........................................ 346, 348 Watts................................................. 346, 348
Turn Signals............................................... 118 Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 302
Indicators (Instrument Panel)...................... 72 Wheel Cover ............................................. 319
Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ........... 318
Window Washers ..................................... 122
U Adding/Refilling Fluid .............................. 281
Unlocking the Doors................................. 101 Switch..................................................... 122
Unlocking the Front Doors Windows (Opening and Closing) ............ 114
from the Inside........................................ 103 Windshield................................................ 122
USB Adapter Cable ........................... 150, 151 Cleaning ................................................. 312
USB Flash Drives........................................ 180 Defrosting/Defogging...................... 145, 147
Washer Fluid ........................................... 281
Wiper Blades ........................................... 295
V Wipers and Washers................................ 122
Valet Key ................................................... 100 Winter Tires .............................................. 305
Vanity Mirrors ............................................... 5 Snow Tires .............................................. 305
Vehicle Identification Number................. 350 Tire Chains .............................................. 305
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) .................. 236 Wipers and Washers................................. 122
Off Button ............................................... 237 Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 295
Off Indicator .............................................. 70 WMA ......................................... 155, 162, 170
System Indicator ........................................ 70 Worn Tires ................................................ 297
Viscosity (Oil)............................. 268, 347, 349
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist) .................. 236
Index

W
Wallpaper.................................................... 92
Warning and Information Messages ......... 75
Warning Indicator On/Blinking................ 337
Warning Labels ........................................... 63
366